2003 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FILE DETAILS:
2003 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Language : English
Pages : 4784
Downloadable : Yes
File Type : PDF
IMAGES PREVIEW OF THE MANUAL:
DESCRIPTION:
2003 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FOREWORD:
- This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2003 INFINITI FX35/FX45.
- In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task.
- All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
2003 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
fwd............................................................................................................................. 1 Exit........................................................................................................................ 0 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 1 FOREWORD.................................................................................................................... 2 A: GENERAL INFORMATION...................................................................................................... 1 GI - General Information................................................................................................ 0 B: ENGINE................................................................................................................... 1 EM - Engine Mechanical.................................................................................................. 0 LU - Engine Lubrication System.......................................................................................... 0 CO - Engine Cooling System.............................................................................................. 0 EC - Engine Control System.............................................................................................. 0 FL - Fuel System........................................................................................................ 0 EX - Exhaust System..................................................................................................... 0 ACC - Accelerator Control System........................................................................................ 0 C: TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE................................................................................................... 1 AT - Automatic Transmission............................................................................................. 0 D: DRIVELINE/AXLE........................................................................................................... 1 TF - Transfer........................................................................................................... 0 PR - Propeller Shaft.................................................................................................... 0 FFD - Front Final Drive................................................................................................. 0 RFD - Rear Final Drive.................................................................................................. 0 FAX - Front Axle........................................................................................................ 0 RAX - Rear Axle......................................................................................................... 0 E: SUSPENSION............................................................................................................... 1 FSU - Front Suspension.................................................................................................. 0 RSU - Rear Suspension................................................................................................... 0 WT - Road Wheels & Tires................................................................................................ 0 F: BRAKES................................................................................................................... 1 BR - Brake System....................................................................................................... 0 PB - Parking Brake System............................................................................................... 0 BRC - Brake Control System.............................................................................................. 0 G: STEERING................................................................................................................. 1 PS - Power Steering System.............................................................................................. 0 H: RESTRAINTS............................................................................................................... 1 SB - Seat Belts......................................................................................................... 0 SRS - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)............................................................................... 0 I: BODY..................................................................................................................... 1 BL - Body, Lock & Security System....................................................................................... 0 GW - Glasses, Window System & Mirrors................................................................................... 0 RF - Roof............................................................................................................... 0 EI - Exterior & Interior................................................................................................ 0 IP - Instrument Panel................................................................................................... 0 SE - Seat............................................................................................................... 0 J: AIR CONDITIONER.......................................................................................................... 1 ATC - Automatic Air Conditioner......................................................................................... 0 K: ELECTRICAL............................................................................................................... 1 SC - Starting & Charging System......................................................................................... 0 LT - Lighting System.................................................................................................... 0 DI - Driver Information System.......................................................................................... 0 WW - Wiper, Washer & Horn............................................................................................... 0 BCS - Body Control System............................................................................................... 0 LAN - LAN System........................................................................................................ 0 AV - Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System........................................................................ 0 ACS - Auto Cruise Control System........................................................................................ 0 PG - Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements............................................................................ 0 L: MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 1 MA - Maintenance........................................................................................................ 0 M: INDEX.................................................................................................................... 1 IDX - Alphabetical Index................................................................................................ 1 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)....................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS............................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)............................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)............................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX............................................................................................ 98 Comment Sheet............................................................................................................... 3 Inch to Metric Conversion Table............................................................................................. 4 QUICK REFERENCE CHART....................................................................................................... 5 GST Mode 6 - Test Value & Test Limit Chart - FX35 (VQ35DE).................................................................. 7 GST Mode 6 - Test Value & Test Limit Chart - FX45 (VQV45DE)................................................................. 8 acc............................................................................................................................. 9 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 9 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM.............................................................................................. 10 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 10 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 10 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 10 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION................................................................................... 10 acs............................................................................................................................. 11 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 11 ASCD.................................................................................................................... 13 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)............................................................................... 13 Description..................................................................................................... 13 ICC..................................................................................................................... 14 PRECAUTIONS......................................................................................................... 14 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”..................... 14 Precautions for ICC System Service.............................................................................. 14 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis........................................................................... 14 PREPARATION......................................................................................................... 15 Special Service Tools........................................................................................... 15 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 16 Outline......................................................................................................... 16 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 16 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 16 BRAKE ASSIST (WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION)........................................................................ 16 System Diagram.................................................................................................. 16 Components Description.......................................................................................... 17 CAN Communication............................................................................................... 17 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT FOR 2WD MODEL........................................................................ 17 System Diagram.......................................................................................... 17 Input/output Signal Chart............................................................................... 18 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT FOR AWD MODELS....................................................................... 21 System Diagram.......................................................................................... 21 Input/output Signal Chart............................................................................... 22 Switch Operation................................................................................................ 26 ICC System Display.............................................................................................. 26 ACTION TEST......................................................................................................... 27 ICC System Running Test......................................................................................... 27 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 27 Set Checking............................................................................................ 27 Check for Increase of the Cruising Speed................................................................ 27 Check for Decrease of the Cruising Speed................................................................ 27 Check for the Cancellation of Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance Control Mode (Normal Driving Condition)....... 27 Check for Restoring the Speed that is Set by Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance Control Mode Before Canc....... 27 Check for On/Off Switch................................................................................. 28 Check for Accel-res, Coast-set, Cancel Switches......................................................... 28 Check for Distance Switch............................................................................... 28 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 28 Set Checking............................................................................................ 28 Check for Increase of the Cruising Speed................................................................ 29 Check for Decrease of the Cruising Speed................................................................ 29 Check for the Cancellation of Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode (Normal Driving Cond....... 29 Check for restoring the Speed that is Set By Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode Befor....... 29 Check for On/Off Switch................................................................................. 29 Check for Accel/Res, Coast/Set Cancel Switches.......................................................... 29 LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................ 30 Outline......................................................................................................... 30 Preparation..................................................................................................... 30 Outline of Adjustment Procedure................................................................................. 30 Setting the ICC Target Board.................................................................................... 30 ADJUSTING HEIGHT OF THE TARGET.............................................................................. 30 ADJUSTING THE RIGHT-LEFT POSITION OF THE TARGET............................................................. 31 SETTING THE TARGET.......................................................................................... 31 Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................... 32 CHECK AFTER THE ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................. 35 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION........................................................................................... 36 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.................................................................. 36 WIRING DIAGRAM...................................................................................................... 37 Schematic....................................................................................................... 37 Wiring Diagram — ICC —.......................................................................................... 38 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE....................................................................................... 45 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Unit...................................................................... 45 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Sensor.................................................................... 46 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................. 47 Work Flow....................................................................................................... 47 CONSULT-II Function............................................................................................. 48 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 48 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................. 48 WORK SUPPORT................................................................................................ 49 Work Item............................................................................................... 49 Cause of Auto-Cancel.................................................................................... 49 Laser Beam Adjust....................................................................................... 49 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS..................................................................................... 49 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................ 50 Operation Procedure..................................................................................... 50 Monitored Item.......................................................................................... 50 ACTIVE TEST................................................................................................. 51 Caution................................................................................................. 51 ICC BUZZER 1............................................................................................ 52 METER LAMP.............................................................................................. 52 STOP LAMP............................................................................................... 52 BOOSTER SOL/V 3......................................................................................... 52 Self-Diagnostic Function........................................................................................ 53 WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................................. 53 WITHOUT CONSULT-II.......................................................................................... 53 Self-Diagnostic Erasing Method.......................................................................... 54 SELF-DIAGNOSIS BY ICC SYSTEM DISPLAY WILL NOT RUN........................................................... 54 Possible Irregular Condition............................................................................ 55 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS......................................................................... 57 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart............................................................................. 57 DTC 11 CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................. 58 DTC 20 CAN COMM CIRCUIT......................................................................................... 58 DTC 31 POWER SUPPLY CIR 1, DTC 34 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2............................................................ 59 DTC 41 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC....................................................................................... 59 DTC 43 VDC/TCS/ABS CIRC......................................................................................... 60 DTC 45 BRAKE SW/STOP L SW....................................................................................... 60 DTC 46 OPERATION SW CIRC........................................................................................ 62 DTC 61 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 63 DTC 62 BOOSTER SOL/V CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 64 DTC 63 RELEASE SW CIRCUIT....................................................................................... 65 DTC 65 PRESSURE CONTROL......................................................................................... 66 DTC 74 LASER BEAM OFF CNTR...................................................................................... 66 DTC 90 STOP LAMP RLY FIX........................................................................................ 67 DTC 92 ECM CIRCUIT.............................................................................................. 71 DTC 96 NP RANGE................................................................................................. 72 DTC 97 AT CIRCUIT............................................................................................... 73 DTC 98 GEAR POSITION............................................................................................ 73 DTC 102 RADAR STAIN............................................................................................. 74 DTC 103 LASER SENSOR FAIL....................................................................................... 75 DTC 104 LASER AIMING INCMP...................................................................................... 75 DTC 107 LASER COMM FAIL......................................................................................... 75 DTC 109 LASER HIGH TEMP......................................................................................... 75 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS...................................................................................... 76 Symptom Chart................................................................................................... 76 Symptom 1: ON/OFF Switch Does Not Switch ON..................................................................... 77 Symptom 2: The ICC System Cannot Be Set (ON/OFF Switch Turns On/Off)............................................ 77 Symptom 3: The ICC System Cannot Be Operated by the CANCEL Switch, ACCEL/RES Switch, or DISTANCE ............... 78 Symptom 4: The ICC System Is Not Cancelled When the Gear Is in Other Than ‘D’................................... 79 Symptom 5: Chime Does Not Sound................................................................................. 79 Symptom 6: Driving Force Is Hunting............................................................................. 80 Symptom 7: The ICC System Frequently Cannot Detect the Vehicle Ahead/The Detection Zone Is Short................ 80 Symptom 8: The System Does Not Detect the Vehicle Ahead at All.................................................. 80 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSPECTION..................................................................................... 82 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 82 ICC Brake Switch and Stop Lamp Switch........................................................................... 82 Booster Solenoid................................................................................................ 82 Release Switch.................................................................................................. 83 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION............................................................................................ 84 ICC Unit........................................................................................................ 84 ICC Sensor...................................................................................................... 84 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 84 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 at.............................................................................................................................. 85 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 85 INDEX FOR DTC........................................................................................................... 89 Alphabetical Index.................................................................................................. 89 DTC No. Index....................................................................................................... 90 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 91 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 91 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine.................................................. 91 Precautions......................................................................................................... 91 Service Notice or Precautions....................................................................................... 92 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS........................................................................................... 92 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis............................................................................... 93 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 94 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 94 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 95 A/T FLUID............................................................................................................... 96 Changing A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 96 Checking A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 96 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 98 Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)................................................................................... 98 Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)................................................................................... 99 Shift Mechanism..................................................................................................... 100 CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................... 100 FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE.................................................................................... 100 CLUTCH AND BAND CHART........................................................................................... 101 POWER TRANSMISSION.............................................................................................. 102 “N” Position................................................................................................ 102 “P” Position................................................................................................ 102 “D1" Position............................................................................................... 103 “M1” Position............................................................................................... 104 “D2" Position............................................................................................... 105 “M2” Position............................................................................................... 106 “D3" and "M3" Position...................................................................................... 107 “D4" and "M4" Position...................................................................................... 108 “D5" and "M5" Position...................................................................................... 109 “R” Position................................................................................................ 110 TCM Function........................................................................................................ 111 CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE.......................................................................................... 111 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM.......................................................................................... 111 CAN Communication................................................................................................... 112 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 112 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 112 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 112 Input/Output Signal Chart................................................................................... 113 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 115 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 115 Input/Output Signal Chart................................................................................... 115 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 119 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 119 Input/Output Signal Chart................................................................................... 119 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 122 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 122 Input/Output Signal Chart................................................................................... 122 Input/Output Signal of TCM.......................................................................................... 126 Line Pressure Control............................................................................................... 127 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN.................................. 127 Normal Control.............................................................................................. 127 Back-Up Control (Engine Brake).............................................................................. 127 During Shift Change......................................................................................... 128 At Low Fluid Temperature.................................................................................... 128 Shift Control....................................................................................................... 128 SHIFT CHANGE.................................................................................................... 128 Shift Change System Diagram................................................................................. 129 Lock-Up Control..................................................................................................... 129 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL................................................................... 129 Lock-Up Control System Diagram.............................................................................. 129 Lock-Up Released............................................................................................ 129 Lock-Up Applied............................................................................................. 130 SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL.......................................................................................... 130 Half-Clutched State......................................................................................... 130 Slip Lock-Up Control........................................................................................ 130 Engine Brake Control................................................................................................ 130 Control Valve....................................................................................................... 131 FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE....................................................................................... 131 FUNCTION OF ATF PRESSURE SWITCH................................................................................. 132 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM........................................................................................ 133 Introduction........................................................................................................ 133 OBD-II Function for A/T System...................................................................................... 133 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II........................................................................... 133 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 133 TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 133 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)................................................................................ 133 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC................................................................................ 133 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data............................................................ 134 HOW TO ERASE DTC................................................................................................ 134 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II).............................................................................. 135 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)..................................................................................... 136 HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)..................................................................................... 136 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).................................................................................... 136 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 136 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 137 DTC Inspection Priority Chart....................................................................................... 137 Fail-Safe........................................................................................................... 137 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 137 Vehicle Speed Sensor........................................................................................ 137 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor........................................................................... 137 Throttle Position Sensor.................................................................................... 137 PNP Switch.................................................................................................. 137 Starter Relay............................................................................................... 137 A/T Interlock............................................................................................... 138 A/T 1st Engine Braking...................................................................................... 138 Line Pressure Solenoid...................................................................................... 138 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid............................................................................ 138 Low Coast Brake Solenoid.................................................................................... 138 Input Clutch Solenoid....................................................................................... 138 Direct Clutch Solenoid...................................................................................... 138 Front Brake Solenoid........................................................................................ 138 High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid........................................................................ 138 Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2............................................................................ 138 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 139 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 139 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 140 Work Flow Chart............................................................................................. 140 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET............................................................................................ 141 Information From Customer................................................................................... 141 Diagnostic Worksheet Chart.................................................................................. 141 A/T Electrical Parts Location....................................................................................... 144 Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................... 145 Wiring Diagram — AT —............................................................................................... 146 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................ 155 A/T FLUID CHECK................................................................................................. 155 Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check......................................................................... 155 Fluid Condition Check....................................................................................... 155 STALL TEST...................................................................................................... 155 Stall Test Procedure........................................................................................ 155 Judgement of Stall Test..................................................................................... 156 LINE PRESSURE TEST.............................................................................................. 156 Line Pressure Test Port..................................................................................... 156 Line Pressure Test Procedure................................................................................ 156 Line Pressure............................................................................................... 157 Judgement of Line Pressure Test............................................................................. 158 ROAD TEST....................................................................................................... 158 Description................................................................................................. 158 Check Before Engine is Started...................................................................................... 159 Check at Idle....................................................................................................... 159 Cruise Test - Part 1................................................................................................ 160 Cruise Test - Part 2................................................................................................ 162 Cruise Test - Part 3................................................................................................ 163 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears................................................................................... 164 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 164 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 164 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up........................................................ 164 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 164 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 165 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up............................................................ 165 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 165 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 165 Symptom Chart....................................................................................................... 166 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values............................................................................ 191 A/T ASSEMBLY TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT.......................................................................... 191 TCM INSPECTION TABLE............................................................................................ 191 CONSULT-II.......................................................................................................... 192 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 192 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE...................................................................................... 193 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)..................................................................... 193 CONSULT-II Setting Procedure................................................................................ 193 Self-diagnostic Result Test Mode............................................................................ 194 Data Monitor Mode (A/T)..................................................................................... 197 DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II........................................................................... 200 CONSULT-II Setting Procedure................................................................................ 200 DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE........................................................................................... 203 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II............................................................................. 204 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)..................................................................... 204 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)..................................................................... 204 TCM SEL-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)......................................................................... 204 Description................................................................................................. 204 Diagnostic Procedure........................................................................................ 204 Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code............................................................................... 205 Erase Self-Diagnosis........................................................................................ 205 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................ 206 Description......................................................................................................... 206 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 206 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 206 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 206 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 206 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 206 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 207 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT.......................................................................................... 208 Description......................................................................................................... 208 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 208 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 208 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 208 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 209 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.................................................................................. 211 Description......................................................................................................... 211 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 211 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 211 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 211 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 211 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 211 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 211 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 212 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR).................................................................. 213 Description......................................................................................................... 213 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 213 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 213 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 213 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 213 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 213 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 214 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 214 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL........................................................................................... 215 Description......................................................................................................... 215 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 215 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 215 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 215 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 215 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 215 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 215 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 215 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE........................................................................ 217 Description......................................................................................................... 217 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 217 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 217 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 217 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 217 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 217 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 217 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 218 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)................................................................................ 219 Description......................................................................................................... 219 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 219 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 219 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 219 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 219 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 219 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 220 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 220 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 221 Description......................................................................................................... 221 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 221 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 221 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 221 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 221 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 221 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 221 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 222 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY).................................................................... 223 Description......................................................................................................... 223 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 223 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 223 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 223 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 223 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 224 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)............................................................................. 226 Description......................................................................................................... 226 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 226 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 226 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 226 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 226 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 226 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)............................................................................. 227 Description......................................................................................................... 227 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 227 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 227 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 227 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 227 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 227 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM).......................................................................... 228 Description......................................................................................................... 228 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 228 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 228 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 228 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 228 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 228 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR...................................................................................... 229 Description......................................................................................................... 229 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 229 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 229 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 229 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 229 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 229 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 229 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT.......................................................................... 231 Description......................................................................................................... 231 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 231 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 231 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 231 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 231 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 231 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 232 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR..................................................................................... 233 Description......................................................................................................... 233 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 233 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 233 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 233 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 233 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 234 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR...................................................................................... 235 Description......................................................................................................... 235 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 235 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 235 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 235 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 235 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK................................................................................................. 237 Description......................................................................................................... 237 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 237 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 237 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 237 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 237 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 237 Judgement of A/T Interlock.......................................................................................... 238 A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE............................................................................ 238 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 238 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING........................................................................................ 240 Description......................................................................................................... 240 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 240 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 240 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 240 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 240 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 240 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 241 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................... 242 Description......................................................................................................... 242 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 242 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 242 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 242 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 242 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 242 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 242 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 243 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION.......................................................................... 244 Description......................................................................................................... 244 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 244 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 244 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 244 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 244 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 244 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 245 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 245 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................... 246 Description......................................................................................................... 246 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 246 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 246 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 246 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 246 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 246 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 246 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 247 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................................... 248 Description......................................................................................................... 248 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 248 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 248 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 248 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 248 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 248 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 249 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 249 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 250 Description......................................................................................................... 250 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 250 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 250 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 250 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 250 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 250 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 250 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 251 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION......................................................................... 252 Description......................................................................................................... 252 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 252 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 252 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 252 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 252 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 252 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 252 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 253 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................... 254 Description......................................................................................................... 254 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 254 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 254 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 254 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 254 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 254 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 254 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 255 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................... 256 Description......................................................................................................... 256 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 256 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 256 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 256 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 256 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 256 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 257 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 257 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................ 258 Description......................................................................................................... 258 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 258 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 258 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 258 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 258 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 258 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 258 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 259 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION....................................................................... 260 Description......................................................................................................... 260 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 260 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 260 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 260 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 260 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 260 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 260 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 261 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH............................................................................................ 262 Description......................................................................................................... 262 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode..................................................................... 262 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 262 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 262 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 262 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 262 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 262 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 264 MANUAL MODE SWITCH.............................................................................................. 264 Position Indicator Lamp............................................................................................. 264 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 264 Position Indicator Lamp Symptom Chart....................................................................... 264 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1......................................................................................... 265 Description......................................................................................................... 265 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 265 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 265 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 265 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 265 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 265 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 266 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3......................................................................................... 267 Description......................................................................................................... 267 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 267 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 267 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 267 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 267 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 267 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 268 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5......................................................................................... 269 Description......................................................................................................... 269 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 269 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 269 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 269 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 269 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 269 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 270 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6......................................................................................... 271 Description......................................................................................................... 271 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 271 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 271 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 271 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 271 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 271 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 272 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT........................................................ 273 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 273 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT.................................................................................................... 274 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 274 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS.......................................................................................... 275 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On........................................................................... 275 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 275 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 275 Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position..................................................................... 276 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 276 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 276 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed.......................................................................... 277 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 277 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 277 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves...................................................................................... 278 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 278 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 278 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)................................................................................... 279 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 279 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 279 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position..................................................................... 282 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 282 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 282 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position...................................................................... 285 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 285 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 285 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1................................................................................... 288 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 288 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 288 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2........................................................................................ 290 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 290 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 290 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3........................................................................................ 293 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 293 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 293 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4........................................................................................ 295 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 295 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 295 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D5........................................................................................ 298 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 298 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 298 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up........................................................................................ 300 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 300 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 300 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition................................................................................. 303 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 303 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 303 Lock-Up Is Not Released............................................................................................. 304 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 304 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 304 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle................................................................................ 305 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 305 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 305 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode.................................................................................... 306 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 306 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 306 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear -> 4th Gear............................................................................ 307 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 307 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 307 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear -> 3rd Gear............................................................................ 309 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 309 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 309 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear -> 2nd Gear............................................................................ 311 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 311 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 311 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear -> 1st Gear............................................................................ 313 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 313 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 313 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake......................................................................... 315 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 315 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 315 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 317 Control Device Removal and Installation............................................................................. 317 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 318 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 318 Adjustment of A/T Position.......................................................................................... 318 Checking of A/T Position............................................................................................ 318 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM................................................................................................... 319 Description......................................................................................................... 319 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location......................................................................... 319 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT......................................................................................... 320 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 321 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE..................................................................................................... 323 Components.......................................................................................................... 323 Removal............................................................................................................. 324 Installation........................................................................................................ 325 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 326 Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2........................................................... 326 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 326 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................ 326 Removal..................................................................................................... 326 Installation................................................................................................ 330 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................... 334 Removal..................................................................................................... 334 Installation................................................................................................ 336 Parking Components (2WD Models Only)................................................................................ 338 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 338 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 338 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 341 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 342 Rear Oil Seal....................................................................................................... 345 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 345 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 345 Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only)...................................................................... 346 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 346 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 346 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 348 AIR BREATHER HOSE....................................................................................................... 351 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 351 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................ 351 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................ 352 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................... 353 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)............................................................................... 353 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 353 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 353 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 354 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 354 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 355 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)............................................................................... 356 COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)......................................................................................... 356 COMPONENTS (FOR VK45DE)......................................................................................... 357 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 357 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 359 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 359 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 359 OVERHAUL................................................................................................................ 361 Components.......................................................................................................... 361 Oil Channel......................................................................................................... 371 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings........................................ 373 DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................. 375 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 375 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS.............................................................................................. 392 Oil Pump............................................................................................................ 392 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 392 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 392 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 393 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch.................................................................................. 395 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 395 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 395 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 396 3rd One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 396 Front Sun Gear Snap Ring.................................................................................... 396 Front Sun Gear.............................................................................................. 396 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 396 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear..................................................................... 397 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 397 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 399 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 400 Front Carrier Snap Ring..................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Snap Ring...................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Drum........................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Drive Plates................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................. 400 Front Carrier............................................................................................... 400 Rear Internal Gear.......................................................................................... 400 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 401 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub........................................................ 403 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 403 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 403 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 405 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring.......................................... 405 1st One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 405 Mid Sun Gear................................................................................................ 405 Rear Sun Gear............................................................................................... 405 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub............................................................................. 405 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 406 High and Low Reverse Clutch......................................................................................... 408 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 408 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 409 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 409 High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring....................................................................... 409 High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................... 409 High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates.............................................. 409 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 409 Direct Clutch....................................................................................................... 411 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 411 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 412 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 412 Direct Clutch Snap Ring..................................................................................... 412 Direct Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................................. 412 Direct Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................ 412 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 412 ASSEMBLY................................................................................................................ 413 Assembly (1)........................................................................................................ 413 Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 425 TOTAL END PLAY.................................................................................................. 425 Assembly (2)........................................................................................................ 427 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 435 General Specifications.............................................................................................. 435 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears................................................................................... 435 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 435 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 435 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up........................................................ 436 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 436 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 436 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up............................................................ 436 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 436 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 436 Stall Speed......................................................................................................... 437 Line Pressure....................................................................................................... 437 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor........................................................................................ 437 Turbine Revolution Sensor........................................................................................... 437 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)........................................................................ 437 Reverse Brake....................................................................................................... 437 Total End Play...................................................................................................... 437 BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY....................................................................... 438 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 atc............................................................................................................................. 439 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 439 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 443 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 443 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...................................................................... 443 CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT........................................................................................ 443 General Refrigerant Precautions..................................................................................... 445 Lubricant Precautions............................................................................................... 445 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection.............................................................................. 446 ABOUT ONE-TOUCH JOINT........................................................................................... 446 Description................................................................................................. 446 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..................................................................... 448 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION............................................................................... 449 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 449 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 449 O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications...................................................................... 450 Precautions for Servicing Compressor................................................................................ 451 Precautions for Service Equipment................................................................................... 451 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 451 ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR........................................................................................ 451 VACUUM PUMP..................................................................................................... 452 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET.............................................................................................. 452 SERVICE HOSES................................................................................................... 452 SERVICE COUPLERS................................................................................................ 453 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE........................................................................................ 453 CALIBRATING ACR4 WEIGHT SCALE................................................................................... 453 CHARGING CYLINDER............................................................................................... 453 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye.................................................................................. 454 IDENTIFICATION.................................................................................................. 454 IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE................................................................................ 454 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis............................................................................... 454 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 455 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 455 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment....................................................................... 456 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 458 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 459 Refrigerant Cycle................................................................................................... 459 REFRIGERANT FLOW................................................................................................ 459 FREEZE PROTECTION............................................................................................... 459 Refrigerant System Protection....................................................................................... 459 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR..................................................................................... 459 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................... 459 V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor................................................................................ 460 GENERAL INFORMATION............................................................................................. 460 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 461 General..................................................................................................... 461 Operation................................................................................................... 462 Component Layout.................................................................................................... 464 LUBRICANT............................................................................................................... 465 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor..................................................................... 465 LUBRICANT....................................................................................................... 465 LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION...................................................................................... 465 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT COMPRESSOR...................................... 466 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT........................................................ 467 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL................................................................................................. 468 Description of Air Conditioner LAN Control System................................................................... 468 System Construction................................................................................................. 468 OPERATION....................................................................................................... 468 TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER........................................................................ 469 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)............................................................ 470 FAN SPEED CONTROL............................................................................................... 470 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 470 OUTLET DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 470 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL........................................................................................... 470 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 470 Description of Control System....................................................................................... 471 Control Operation................................................................................................... 471 DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................................................. 472 AUTO SWITCH..................................................................................................... 472 TEMPERATURE SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (DRIVER SIDE)................................................. 472 TEMPERATURE SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (PASSENGER SIDE).............................................. 472 RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH...................................................................................... 472 FRESH (FRE) SWITCH.............................................................................................. 472 DEFROSTER (DEF) SWITCH.......................................................................................... 472 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH..................................................................................... 472 OFF SWITCH...................................................................................................... 472 A/C SWITCH...................................................................................................... 472 MODE SWITCH..................................................................................................... 472 FAN SWITCH...................................................................................................... 472 DUAL SWITCH (WITH LEFT AND RIGHT VENTILATION TEMPERATURE SEPARATELY CONTROL SYSTEM)............................. 472 Fail-safe Function.................................................................................................. 473 Discharge Air Flow.................................................................................................. 474 System Description.................................................................................................. 475 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................................. 475 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 476 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 476 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 477 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 477 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 477 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 480 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 480 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 480 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 483 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 483 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 484 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 486 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 486 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 487 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 490 CONSULT-II.......................................................................................................... 490 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION...................................................................................... 490 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 491 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 491 Display Item List........................................................................................... 491 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 492 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 492 SYMPTOM TABLE................................................................................................... 492 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 494 ENGINE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................. 494 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT........................................................................................... 495 Schematic........................................................................................................... 496 Wiring Diagram —A/C—................................................................................................ 497 Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value............................................................................. 502 PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT................................................................................... 502 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP..................................................... 502 Self-diagnosis Function............................................................................................. 504 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 504 FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 505 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER................................................................ 511 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION SETTING TRIMMER.............................................................. 512 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: INLET PORT MEMORY FUNCTION................................................................. 512 Operational Check................................................................................................... 513 CHECKING MEMORY FUNCTION........................................................................................ 513 CHECKING BLOWER................................................................................................. 513 CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR.......................................................................................... 513 CHECKING RECIRCULATION.......................................................................................... 514 CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE................................................................................... 514 CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE................................................................................... 514 CHECK A/C SWITCH................................................................................................ 514 CHECKING AUTO MODE.............................................................................................. 515 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto Amp........................................................................ 515 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 515 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 516 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. (Automatic Amplifier)............................................................ 516 Potentio Temperature Control (PTC).......................................................................... 516 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM............................................................................. 516 LAN System Circuit.................................................................................................. 518 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT............................................................................ 518 Mode Door Motor Circuit............................................................................................. 521 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 521 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 522 Component Parts............................................................................................. 522 System Operation............................................................................................ 522 Mode Door Control Specification............................................................................. 523 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 523 Mode Door Motor............................................................................................. 523 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR........................................................................ 523 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit.......................................................................................... 524 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 524 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 525 Component Parts............................................................................................. 525 System Operation............................................................................................ 525 Air Mix Door Control Specification.......................................................................... 525 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 526 Air Mix Door Motor.......................................................................................... 526 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR........................................................................... 526 Air Mix Door Motor PBR Circuit...................................................................................... 526 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR PBR....................................................................... 526 Intake Door Motor Circuit........................................................................................... 527 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 527 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 528 Component Parts............................................................................................. 528 System Operation............................................................................................ 528 Intake Door Control Specification........................................................................... 528 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 529 Intake Door Motor........................................................................................... 529 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR...................................................................... 529 Blower Motor Circuit................................................................................................ 530 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 530 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 531 Component Parts............................................................................................. 531 System Operation............................................................................................ 531 Automatic Mode.............................................................................................. 531 Starting Fan Speed Control.................................................................................. 532 Blower Speed Compensation................................................................................... 532 Fan Speed Control Specification............................................................................. 532 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 532 Brush-less Motor............................................................................................ 532 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR........................................................................... 532 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 535 Blower Motor................................................................................................ 535 Magnet Clutch Circuit............................................................................................... 536 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 536 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 537 Low Temperature Protection Control.......................................................................... 537 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH.......................................................................... 537 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 541 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor................................................................................. 541 Insufficient Cooling................................................................................................ 542 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 542 PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES...................................................................................... 543 PERFORMANCE CHART............................................................................................... 545 Test Condition.............................................................................................. 545 Test Reading................................................................................................ 545 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE.......................................................................... 546 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High.............................................................. 546 High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low............................................. 546 High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High............................................. 547 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low............................................................... 547 Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative................................................................ 548 Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative.......................................................................... 548 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING................................................................... 548 Insufficient Heating................................................................................................ 550 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 550 Noise............................................................................................................... 551 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 551 Self-diagnosis...................................................................................................... 552 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 552 Memory Function..................................................................................................... 553 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 553 Ambient Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 554 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 554 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 554 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS............................................................................... 554 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR......................................................................... 554 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 556 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 556 In-vehicle Sensor Circuit........................................................................................... 557 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 557 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 557 Aspirator................................................................................................... 557 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR...................................................................... 558 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 559 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 559 Sunload Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 560 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 560 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 560 SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS........................................................................................... 560 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD SENSOR......................................................................... 560 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 562 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 562 Intake Sensor Circuit............................................................................................... 563 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 563 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 563 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR.......................................................................... 563 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 564 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 564 CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................. 565 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 565 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 565 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 565 AUTO AMP................................................................................................................ 566 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp............................................................... 566 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 566 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 566 AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 567 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 567 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 567 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 567 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................................................... 568 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 568 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 568 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 568 SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 569 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 569 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 569 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 569 INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................................................... 570 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 570 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 570 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 571 BLOWER UNIT............................................................................................................. 572 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 572 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 572 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 572 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 573 BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................................................ 574 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 574 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 574 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 574 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................................................... 575 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 575 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 575 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 575 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................... 576 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 576 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 576 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 577 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 578 MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................................................... 580 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 580 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 580 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 580 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................................................... 581 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 581 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 581 Driver Side................................................................................................. 581 Passenger Side.............................................................................................. 581 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 581 HEATER CORE............................................................................................................. 582 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 582 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 582 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 582 DUCTS AND GRILLES....................................................................................................... 583 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 583 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 583 Removal of Center Ventilator Grille......................................................................... 583 Removal of Side Ventilation................................................................................. 583 Removal of Rear Ventilator Grille........................................................................... 583 Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Ducts and Ventilator Ducts..................................................... 584 Removal of Rear Ventilator Ducts............................................................................ 585 Removal of Foot Ducts....................................................................................... 586 Removal of Floor Ducts...................................................................................... 586 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 586 REFRIGERANT LINES....................................................................................................... 587 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure................................................................................. 587 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.......................................................................... 587 Discharging Refrigerant..................................................................................... 587 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant.................................................................. 587 Components.......................................................................................................... 589 VK45DE.......................................................................................................... 589 VQ35DE.......................................................................................................... 590 Removal and Installation of Compressor.............................................................................. 590 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 590 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 590 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 591 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 592 Removal and Installation of......................................................................................... 593 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 593 Overhaul.................................................................................................... 593 Inspection.................................................................................................. 594 Coil........................................................................................................ 594 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 595 Break-in Operation.......................................................................................... 596 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Flexible Hose.............................................................. 597 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 597 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 598 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Flexible Hose............................................................. 598 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 598 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 599 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 1 (Engine Compartment)................................................ 599 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 599 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 600 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Pipe 1 and 2 (Engine Compartment)......................................... 600 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 600 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 601 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 2 and High-pressure Pipe 3............................................ 601 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 601 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 602 Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank............................................................................. 603 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 603 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 603 Removal and Installation of Condenser............................................................................... 604 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 604 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 604 Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor............................................................. 605 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 605 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 605 Removal and Installation of Evaporator.............................................................................. 605 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 605 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 605 Removal and Installation of Expansion Valve......................................................................... 607 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 607 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 607 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks...................................................................................... 608 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector....................................................... 608 Dye Injection....................................................................................................... 608 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector................................................................................ 609 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR.......................................................................... 609 CHECKING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 610 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 612 Compressor.......................................................................................................... 612 Lubricant........................................................................................................... 612 Refrigerant......................................................................................................... 612 Engine Idling Speed................................................................................................. 612 Belt Tension........................................................................................................ 612 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 av.............................................................................................................................. 613 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 613 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 617 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 617 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis............................................................................... 617 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 618 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 618 AUDIO................................................................................................................... 619 System Description.................................................................................................. 619 BASE SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 619 BOSE SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 619 SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM................................................................................... 620 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 621 Schematic — Base System —........................................................................................... 622 WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 622 WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................... 623 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — / Base System.............................................................................. 624 Schematic — BOSE System —........................................................................................... 631 WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 631 WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................... 632 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — / BOSE System.............................................................................. 633 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 642 Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp.................................................................. 643 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 645 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 645 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 645 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 645 Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................................... 645 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO, TAPE AND CD (BASE SYSTEM)............................................................... 645 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO, TAPE AND CD (BOSE SYSTEM)............................................................... 646 FOR RADIO ONLY.................................................................................................. 647 FOR CASSETTE PLAYER ONLY........................................................................................ 647 FOR CD ONLY..................................................................................................... 647 Noise Inspection.................................................................................................... 648 TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE................................................................................ 648 Power Supply Circuit Inspection..................................................................................... 649 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 650 A/C and AV Switch Inspection........................................................................................ 651 BOSE Speaker Amp. Inspection........................................................................................ 652 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 652 Locking CD Auto-changer Mechanism................................................................................... 654 DAMPER LOCK PROCEDURE........................................................................................... 654 Removal and Installation of Audio Unit.............................................................................. 654 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 654 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 654 Disassembly and Assembly for Audio Unit............................................................................. 655 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 655 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 655 Removal and Installation for A/C and AV Switch...................................................................... 655 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 655 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 656 Removal and Installation for Front Door Speaker..................................................................... 656 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 656 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 656 Removal and Installation for Rear Door Speaker...................................................................... 656 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 656 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 656 Removal and Installation for Instrument Speaker..................................................................... 657 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 657 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 657 Removal and Installation for Tweeter (BOSE System).................................................................. 657 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 657 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 657 Removal and Installation for Woofer (BOSE System)................................................................... 657 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 657 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 657 Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp....................................................................... 658 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 658 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 658 AUDIO ANTENNA........................................................................................................... 659 System Description.................................................................................................. 659 Wiring Diagram — M/ANT —............................................................................................ 660 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 661 Antenna Amp. Inspection............................................................................................. 661 Location of Antenna................................................................................................. 662 Window Antenna Repair............................................................................................... 662 CHECK ELEMENT................................................................................................... 662 Removal and Installation of Roof antenna............................................................................ 664 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 664 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 664 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM............................................................................................... 665 System Description.................................................................................................. 665 A/C AND AV SWITCH SYSTEM........................................................................................ 665 PRECAUTION OF LCD MONITOR....................................................................................... 665 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND......................................................................................... 665 DRIVE COMPUTER.................................................................................................. 666 TRIP Switch................................................................................................. 666 FUEL ECON Switch............................................................................................ 666 MAINT Switch (Maintenance Switch)........................................................................... 667 E/M Switch...................................................................................................... 667 SETTING SCREEN.................................................................................................. 668 Adjustable Vehicle Status................................................................................... 668 D/N SCREEN.................................................................................................. 669 WARNING INDICATIONS............................................................................................. 669 AV COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................... 669 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 670 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 671 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 672 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 672 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 672 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 675 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 675 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 675 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 678 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 678 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 679 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 681 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 681 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 682 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 685 Schematic........................................................................................................... 686 Wiring Diagram — INF/D —............................................................................................ 687 Schematic........................................................................................................... 692 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 693 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit...................................................................... 696 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 697 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 698 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 698 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 698 Self-Diagnosis Mode................................................................................................. 698 OPERATION PROCEDURES............................................................................................ 698 NETWORK CHECK................................................................................................... 699 PARTS CHECK..................................................................................................... 700 DISPLAY DETAIL SCREEN....................................................................................... 700 HVAC DETAIL SCREEN.............................................................................................. 700 VERSION CHECK................................................................................................... 700 CAN DIAG MNTR (CAN DIAG MONITOR)................................................................................ 700 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 701 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 701 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 701 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 701 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 702 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit.............................................................. 703 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for A/C and AV Switch......................................................... 704 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 704 Illumination Signal Inspection...................................................................................... 705 Ignition Signal Inspection.......................................................................................... 706 Audio Communication Line Inspection................................................................................. 706 A/C and AV Switch Does Not Operate.................................................................................. 708 CAN Communication Line Inspection................................................................................... 709 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 709 Removal and Installation of Display................................................................................. 711 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 711 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 711 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 711 NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................................... 712 System Description.................................................................................................. 712 TRAVEL DISTANCE................................................................................................. 712 TRAVEL DIRECTION................................................................................................ 712 MAP-MATCHING.................................................................................................... 712 GPS (GLOBALPOSITIONING SYSTEM)................................................................................. 713 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 714 NAVI Control Unit........................................................................................... 714 DVD-ROM Drive............................................................................................... 714 Map DVD-ROM................................................................................................. 714 Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)................................................................................. 714 BIRDVIEW........................................................................................................ 714 Description................................................................................................. 715 MAP DISPLAY..................................................................................................... 715 FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH....................................................................................... 716 Display with Pushed “DEST” Button........................................................................... 716 Display with Pushed “ROUTE” Button.......................................................................... 717 Display with Pushed “SETTING” Button........................................................................ 718 Display Settings............................................................................................ 718 Brightness/Contrast/Map Back Ground......................................................................... 718 Display Off................................................................................................. 718 Setting of the Under Section Display........................................................................ 718 Vehicle Electronic Systems.................................................................................. 719 Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle..................................................................... 719 Lift Steering Column When Exiting Vehicle................................................................... 719 Selective Door Unlock (With Intelligent Key)................................................................ 720 Keyless Remote Response -Horn............................................................................... 720 Keyless Remote Response -Lights............................................................................. 720 Auto Re-Lock Time........................................................................................... 720 Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights......................................................................... 720 Automatic Headlights Off Delay.............................................................................. 720 Speed Dependent Wiper....................................................................................... 720 Intelligent Key Lock Response-Sound......................................................................... 720 Intelligent Key Unlock Response-Beep Sound.................................................................. 720 Intelligent Key Engine Start Function....................................................................... 720 Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock Function........................................................................ 720 Return All Settings to Default.............................................................................. 720 System Settings............................................................................................. 721 Language Setting............................................................................................ 721 Beep Setting................................................................................................ 721 Navigation Settings......................................................................................... 722 “VIEW” MODE..................................................................................................... 722 “HEADING” MODE.................................................................................................. 723 “NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE..................................................................................... 723 “SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE.................................................................................... 723 “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE.................................................................................. 723 “AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE............................................................................................ 724 “AVOID AREA SETTING” MODE....................................................................................... 724 “CLEAR MEMORY” MODE............................................................................................. 724 “EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE........................................................................................ 725 “GPS INFORMATION” MODE.......................................................................................... 725 “QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE.............................................................................. 725 “SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE........................................................................................ 725 “TRACKING” MODE................................................................................................. 726 GUIDANCE VOLUME................................................................................................. 726 Description................................................................................................. 726 Activation/Deactivation Setting............................................................................. 726 Voice Volume Setting........................................................................................ 726 DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON............................................................................... 726 TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2................................................................................................ 727 FUEL ECONOMY.................................................................................................... 727 MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................... 727 ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION..................................................................................... 727 TIRE PRESSURE................................................................................................... 728 WARNING INDICATIONS............................................................................................. 728 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 729 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 729 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 730 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 730 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 730 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 733 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 733 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 733 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 736 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 736 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 737 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 739 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 739 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 740 Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location............................................................. 743 Schematic—NAVI—..................................................................................................... 744 Wiring Diagram —NAVI—............................................................................................... 745 Schematic — COMM —.................................................................................................. 753 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 754 Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit................................................................. 759 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit.............................................................. 761 Terminals and Reference Value for Display........................................................................... 765 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 767 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 768 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 768 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 768 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)........................................................................................... 769 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 769 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 771 Quick reference table....................................................................................... 771 Self-Diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 771 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI).......................................................................................... 771 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 771 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 773 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 773 Self-diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 773 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode........................................................................................ 774 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 774 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 774 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 775 AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL............................................................................................ 775 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 776 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 776 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 777 HISTORY OF ERRORS............................................................................................... 777 DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS.................................................................................. 778 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 779 Display Longitude & Latitude................................................................................ 780 Angle Adjustment............................................................................................ 780 Speed Calibration........................................................................................... 780 Initialize Location......................................................................................... 780 CAN DIAG Support Monitor............................................................................................ 781 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 781 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 782 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 782 Starting the SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE............................................................................ 782 Diagnosis Function.......................................................................................... 782 Exiting the SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE............................................................................. 782 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit......................................................... 783 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit...................................................... 784 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display................................................................... 785 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for A/C and AV Switch......................................................... 787 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.................................................................... 787 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit................................................................. 788 Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit..................................................................... 789 Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit.................................................................. 790 Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit......................................................................... 790 Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit...................................................................... 790 Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.......................................................................... 790 Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit....................................................................... 791 When Malfunctioning Connection Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit................................... 791 When Malfunctioning Connection Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit.......................................... 792 When Malfunctioning Connection Between Display Control Unit and Display............................................. 794 CAN Communication Line Check........................................................................................ 796 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is not Inserted....................................................... 796 If NAVI Control Unit Detects that Inserted DVD-ROM Map Malfunctioning or if it is Impossible to L................... 796 If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning........................................... 797 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)......................................................... 797 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)........................................................ 798 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish)...................................................... 799 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper ( All screens Looks Bluish)........................................................ 800 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Looks Reddish)........................................................ 801 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Looks Yellowish)...................................................... 802 NAVI Screen is Rolling.............................................................................................. 804 Guide Sound is Not Heard............................................................................................ 805 Screen is Not Shown................................................................................................. 805 Operating Screen for Audio and A/C is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen........................................ 806 TRIP, FUEL ECON and MAINTENANCE Screens are Not Shown............................................................... 807 Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“***” is Shown)........................................................ 807 Driving Distance or Average Speed is Not Shown (“***” is Shown)..................................................... 808 WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown............................................................................... 808 TIRE PRESSURE Screen is not Shown................................................................................... 808 Unable to Operate All of A/C and AV switch (Unable to start Self-Diagnosis)......................................... 809 Position of Current-Location Mark is Not Correct.................................................................... 810 Driving Test........................................................................................................ 810 Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction.......................................................................... 811 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................................. 811 VEHICLE MARK.................................................................................................... 811 DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET.............................................. 812 VOICE GUIDE..................................................................................................... 813 ROUTE SEARCH.................................................................................................... 813 EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT.................................................................. 814 CURRENT LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG................................................ 817 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS..................................................................................... 817 CURRENT LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA...................................................................... 818 WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS ............... 818 LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW..................................................................... 818 ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION....................... 818 NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED.......................................................................... 818 CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN.............................................. 818 Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit................................................................................ 819 Removal and Installation of NAVI control Unit....................................................................... 820 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 820 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 820 Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna............................................................................. 820 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 820 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 820 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 821 Removal and Installation of Display Unit............................................................................ 821 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit.................................................................... 821 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 821 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 821 INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM.................................................................................... 822 System Description.................................................................................................. 822 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 823 Wiring Diagram – MES –.............................................................................................. 824 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Player........................................................................ 826 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Display....................................................................... 827 DVD Player Is Not Work.............................................................................................. 829 Screen Is Not Shown (While Sounds Come Out of an Audio Speaker, Did not do of a Head Phone)......................... 831 Screen is not Shown (Sounds Come Out of Both an Audio Speaker and a Head Phone)..................................... 832 Head Phone Does Not Sound........................................................................................... 833 Remote Controller Is Not Work....................................................................................... 834 No CD·DVD Sound From All Speakers................................................................................... 835 Removal and Installation for DVD Player............................................................................. 836 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 836 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 837 Removal and Installation for DVD Display Unit....................................................................... 837 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 837 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 838 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 bcs............................................................................................................................. 839 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 839 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 840 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 840 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)............................................................................................... 841 System Description.................................................................................................. 841 BCM FUNCTION.................................................................................................... 841 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION............................................................................. 841 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL....................................................................................... 843 BCM STATUS CONTROL.............................................................................................. 844 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY.............................................................................. 845 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 845 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND COMBINATION METER................................................................. 845 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 845 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM............................................................................. 846 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 847 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 847 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 848 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 848 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 848 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 851 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 851 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 851 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 854 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 854 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 855 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 857 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 857 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 858 Schematic........................................................................................................... 861 CONSULT-II.......................................................................................................... 863 CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 863 ITEMS OF EACH PART.............................................................................................. 864 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 865 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 865 Display Item List........................................................................................... 865 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)...................................................... 865 Removal and Installation of BCM..................................................................................... 866 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 866 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 866 bl.............................................................................................................................. 867 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 867 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 871 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 871 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 871 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 871 Precautions for Work................................................................................................ 871 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis............................................................................... 872 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 873 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 873 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 873 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS..................................................................................... 874 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 874 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW.............................................................................................. 874 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE.............................................................................. 875 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS................................................................................. 875 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE.................................................................... 875 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................ 875 CONFIRM THE REPAIR.............................................................................................. 876 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting........................................................................... 876 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................ 876 CENTER CONSOLE.................................................................................................. 876 DOORS........................................................................................................... 876 TRUNK........................................................................................................... 877 SUNROOF/HEADLINER............................................................................................... 877 SEATS........................................................................................................... 877 UNDERHOOD....................................................................................................... 877 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................ 878 HOOD.................................................................................................................... 880 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 880 CLEARANCE AND SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT......................................................................... 880 HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................ 880 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly........................................................................... 881 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control....................................................................... 882 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 882 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 882 Hood Lock Control Inspection........................................................................................ 883 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT................................................................................................... 884 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 884 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 884 FRONT FENDER............................................................................................................ 885 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 885 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 885 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 885 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 886 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 886 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 887 System Description.................................................................................................. 887 OUTLINE......................................................................................................... 888 Functions Available by Operating the Door Lock and Unlock Switches on Driver's Door and Passenger........... 888 Functions Available by Operating the Key Cylinder Switch on Driver's........................................ 888 Select Unlock Operation..................................................................................... 888 Key Reminder Door System.................................................................................... 889 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 889 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 890 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 890 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 890 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 893 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 893 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 893 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 896 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 896 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 897 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 899 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 899 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 900 Schematic (With Intelligent Key).................................................................................... 903 Wiring Diagram -D/LOCK- (With Intelligent Key)...................................................................... 904 FIG. 1.......................................................................................................... 904 FIG. 2.......................................................................................................... 905 FIG. 3.......................................................................................................... 906 FIG. 4.......................................................................................................... 907 FIG. 5.......................................................................................................... 908 Schematic (Without Intelligent Key)................................................................................. 909 Wiring Diagram -D/LOCK- (Without Intelligent Key)................................................................... 910 FIG. 6.......................................................................................................... 910 FIG. 7.......................................................................................................... 911 FIG. 8.......................................................................................................... 912 FIG. 9.......................................................................................................... 913 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 914 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit (With Intelligent Key System)................................ 914 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 914 Preliminary Check................................................................................................... 915 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK CHECK..................................................................................... 915 CONSULT-II Function................................................................................................. 916 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 916 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 917 Work Support................................................................................................ 917 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 917 Active Test................................................................................................. 917 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 918 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 919 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 919 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 921 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 923 Check Door Lock and Unlock Switch................................................................................... 925 Check Door Lock Actuator (Driver side).............................................................................. 927 Check Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side and Rear LH/RH)............................................................ 928 Check Fuel Lid Opener Actuator...................................................................................... 929 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Lock)......................................................................... 930 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Unlock)....................................................................... 931 Check Select Unlock Relay Circuit................................................................................... 932 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM............................................................................................. 933 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 933 System Description.................................................................................................. 934 INPUTS.......................................................................................................... 934 OPERATED PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 935 Power Door Lock Operation................................................................................... 935 Hazard and Horn Reminder.................................................................................... 935 Auto Door Lock Operation.................................................................................... 935 Panic Alarm Operation....................................................................................... 936 Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation.................................................................. 936 Room Lamp and Ignition Key ring Illumination Operation...................................................... 936 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 936 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 937 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 937 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 938 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 940 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 940 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 940 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 944 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 944 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 944 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 947 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 947 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 948 Schematic........................................................................................................... 951 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES—............................................................................................ 952 FIG. 1.......................................................................................................... 952 FIG. 2.......................................................................................................... 953 FIG. 3.......................................................................................................... 954 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 955 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 956 CONSULT-II Function................................................................................................. 956 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 956 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 957 Work Support................................................................................................ 957 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 959 Active Test................................................................................................. 959 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 959 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 960 Check Key Fob Battery and Function.................................................................................. 962 Check ACC Switch.................................................................................................... 963 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 964 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 964 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 966 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 968 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 970 Check Hazard Function............................................................................................... 971 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 971 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 971 Check Map Lamp and Ignition Keyhole Illumination Function........................................................... 971 ID Code Entry Procedure............................................................................................. 972 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................... 972 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................................ 974 Key Fob Battery Replacement......................................................................................... 975 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 976 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 976 System Description.................................................................................................. 978 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 978 Operation Description....................................................................................... 978 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 979 Auto Door Lock Function..................................................................................... 979 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 979 Intelligent Key Lock-in Prevention Function................................................................. 979 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTIONS.................................................................................. 979 Door Lock Function.......................................................................................... 979 Map Lamp And Keyhole Illumination Function.................................................................. 980 Panic Alarm Function........................................................................................ 980 Remote Control Power Window Down (open) Operation........................................................... 980 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 980 ENGINE STARTUP FUNCTION......................................................................................... 980 Operation Description....................................................................................... 980 Operation Range............................................................................................. 980 Active Check Function....................................................................................... 981 WARNING AND ALARM FUNCTION...................................................................................... 981 Operation Description....................................................................................... 981 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 981 Warning Procedure........................................................................................... 982 CHANGE SETTINGS FUNCTION........................................................................................ 984 Changing Settings With the Intelligent Key.................................................................. 984 Changing Settings Using CONSULT-II.......................................................................... 984 Changing Settings Using Display Unit........................................................................ 984 INTELLIGENT KEY REGISTRATION.................................................................................... 984 STEERING LOCK UNIT REGISTRATION................................................................................. 984 Steering Lock Unit ID Registration.......................................................................... 984 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 985 TYPE 1/TYPE2.................................................................................................... 986 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 986 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 986 TYPE 3.......................................................................................................... 989 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 989 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 989 TYPE 4/TYPE5.................................................................................................... 992 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 992 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 993 TYPE 6.......................................................................................................... 995 System Diagram.............................................................................................. 995 Input/output Signal Chart................................................................................... 996 Schematic........................................................................................................... 999 Wiring Diagram — I/KEY—.............................................................................................1001 Terminals and Reference Value for INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT..............................................................1014 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock unit................................................................1016 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1016 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R..........................................................................1017 Diagnosis Procedure.................................................................................................1018 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1018 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................1019 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................1019 BASIC OPERATION.................................................................................................1019 CONSULT-II Application Items........................................................................................1020 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................1020 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1020 MAIN SIGNALS Display Item...................................................................................1020 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1021 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1021 List of Operation Related Parts.....................................................................................1022 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1023 ALL FUNCTIONS OF THE INTELLIGENT KEY ARE NOT OPERATING..........................................................1023 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.......................................................................1023 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION MALFUNCTION..................................................................................1024 ENGINE START FUNCTION MALFUNCTION...............................................................................1025 Intelligent Key Operation Inspection........................................................................1025 Mechanical Key Operation Inspection.........................................................................1025 WARNING CHIME FUNCTION MALFUNCTION..............................................................................1025 Check CAN Communication System Inspection...........................................................................1027 Check Intelligent Key Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit..........................................................1028 Check Key Switch (Intelligent Key Unit Input).......................................................................1028 Check Key Switch (BCM Input)........................................................................................1030 Check Ignition Knob Switch..........................................................................................1031 Check Door Switch...................................................................................................1032 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH).....................................................................1032 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH..........................................................................................1034 Check Unlock Sensor.................................................................................................1035 Check Door Request Switch...........................................................................................1037 Check Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer................................................................................1038 Check Outside Key Antenna...........................................................................................1039 Check Inside Key Antenna............................................................................................1041 Check Steering Lock Unit............................................................................................1042 Check Stop Lamp Switch..............................................................................................1044 Check Detention Switch..............................................................................................1045 Check Select Unlock Relay...........................................................................................1047 Check Hazard Function...............................................................................................1048 Check Horn Function.................................................................................................1048 Check Headlamp Function.............................................................................................1048 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................1048 Removal and Installation of Intelligent Key Unit....................................................................1049 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1049 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1049 Intelligent Key Inspection..........................................................................................1050 INTELLIGENT KEY DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY........................................................................1050 REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY INSPECTION............................................................................1050 DOOR....................................................................................................................1051 Fitting Adjustment..................................................................................................1051 FRONT DOOR......................................................................................................1051 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End...........................................1051 REAR DOOR.......................................................................................................1051 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End...........................................1051 STRIKER ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................................1052 Removal and Installation of Front Door..............................................................................1052 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1052 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1053 Removal and Installation of Rear Door...............................................................................1053 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1053 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1054 Removal and Installation of Door Weathers Trip......................................................................1054 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1054 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1054 FRONT DOOR LOCK.........................................................................................................1055 Component Structure.................................................................................................1055 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1055 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1055 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1057 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................1058 DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY......................................................................................1058 REAR DOOR LOCK..........................................................................................................1059 Component Structure.................................................................................................1059 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1059 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1059 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1061 BACK DOOR...............................................................................................................1062 Fitting Adjustment..................................................................................................1062 VERTICAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT...........................................................................1062 Back Door Assembly..................................................................................................1062 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1062 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1063 INSPECTION......................................................................................................1063 Removal and Installation of Back Door Striker.......................................................................1063 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1063 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1063 Removal and Installation of Back Door Stay..........................................................................1064 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1064 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1064 Removal and Installation of Dam Tail Male & Female..................................................................1064 REMOVE..........................................................................................................1064 Removal and Installation of Back Door Weatherstrip..................................................................1065 BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1066 Removal and Installation of Back Door Lock & Closure Assembly.......................................................1066 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1066 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1066 INSPECTION......................................................................................................1066 Removal and Installation of Back Door Opener Switch.................................................................1066 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1066 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1066 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................1067 BACK DOOR LOCK & CLOSURE ASSEMBLY...............................................................................1067 BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE SYSTEM...........................................................................................1068 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1068 System Description..................................................................................................1068 CLOSE OPERATION.................................................................................................1068 NON-OPERATION CONDITION.........................................................................................1068 OPEN OPERATION..................................................................................................1069 Wiring Diagram — B/CLOS —...........................................................................................1070 Terminals and Reference Value for Back Door Closure Control Unit....................................................1072 Work Flow...........................................................................................................1073 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1073 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................1073 Back Door Closure Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check................................................1074 Half-Latch Switch Check.............................................................................................1074 Close Switch Check..................................................................................................1076 Open Switch Check...................................................................................................1077 Back Door Opener Switch Check.......................................................................................1078 Unlock Sensor Check.................................................................................................1079 Closure Motor Check.................................................................................................1080 Removal and Installation of Back Door Closer Control Unit...........................................................1081 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM.................................................................................1082 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1082 System Description..................................................................................................1083 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1083 Operation Flow..............................................................................................1083 Setting the Vehicle Security System.........................................................................1083 Canceling the Set Vehicle Security System...................................................................1084 Canceling the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System................................................1084 Activating the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System...............................................1084 POWER SUPPLY....................................................................................................1084 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM........................................................................1084 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION.........................................................................1085 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION............................................................................1085 PANIC ALARM OPERATION...........................................................................................1085 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1086 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1086 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................1087 System Diagram..............................................................................................1087 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1087 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................1090 System Diagram..............................................................................................1090 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1090 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................1093 System Diagram..............................................................................................1093 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1094 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................1096 System Diagram..............................................................................................1096 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1097 Schematic...........................................................................................................1100 Wiring Diagram -VEHSEC-.............................................................................................1101 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1106 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R..........................................................................1106 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................1107 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM.....................................................................................1108 Data Monitor................................................................................................1108 Active Test.................................................................................................1108 Work Support................................................................................................1108 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1109 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1109 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1110 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1111 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1112 1 – 1 DOOR SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1112 1 – 2 HOOD SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1114 1 – 3 BACK DOOR SWITCH CHECK....................................................................................1115 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1117 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK...................................................................................1117 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1118 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK............................................................................1118 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1118 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK...............................................................................1118 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1118 VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK...........................................................................1118 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1118 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK...............................................................................1118 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).........................................................................1119 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1119 System Description..................................................................................................1119 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1119 SECURITY INDICATOR..............................................................................................1121 Condition of Security Indicator.............................................................................1121 System Composition..................................................................................................1121 ECM Re-communicating Function.......................................................................................1122 Wiring Diagram – NATS –.............................................................................................1123 MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM..............................................................................1123 MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM...........................................................................1125 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock Unit/with Intelligent Key System....................................1126 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit/with Intelligent Key System..................................1126 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1127 CONSULT-II..........................................................................................................1128 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................1128 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION........................................................................1128 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.............................................................................1129 NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART..........................................................................1129 Diagnosis Procedure.................................................................................................1130 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1130 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1131 Security Indicator Inspection.......................................................................................1131 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1132 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1133 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1134 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1135 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1136 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1137 Diagnostic Procedure 7..............................................................................................1139 Removal and Installation NATS Antenna Amp...........................................................................1140 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1140 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1140 INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER.........................................................................................1141 Wiring Diagram —TRNSCV—.............................................................................................1141 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................................................................1142 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................1142 SYMPTOM: Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver.............................................................1142 BODY REPAIR.............................................................................................................1144 Body Exterior Paint Color...........................................................................................1144 Body Component Parts................................................................................................1145 UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS.......................................................................................1145 BODY COMPONENT PARTS............................................................................................1147 Corrosion Protection................................................................................................1149 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1149 Anti-corrosive precoated steel (Galvannealed steel).........................................................1149 Phosphate coating treatment and cationic electrodeposition primer...........................................1149 ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX..............................................................................................1150 UNDERCOATING....................................................................................................1151 Precautions in undercoating.................................................................................1151 STONE GUARD COAT................................................................................................1152 Body Sealing........................................................................................................1153 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1153 Body Construction...................................................................................................1156 BODY CONSTRUCTION...............................................................................................1156 Body Alignment......................................................................................................1157 BODY CENTER MARKS...............................................................................................1157 PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS......................................................................................1158 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1159 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................1160 Measurement.................................................................................................1160 Measurement points..........................................................................................1161 UNDERBODY.......................................................................................................1162 Measurement.................................................................................................1162 Measurement points..........................................................................................1163 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................1164 Measurement.................................................................................................1164 Measurement points..........................................................................................1165 REAR BODY.......................................................................................................1166 Measurement.................................................................................................1166 Measurement points..........................................................................................1167 Handling Precautions For Plastics...................................................................................1168 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS...............................................................................1168 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS......................................................................................1169 Precautions In Repairing High Strength Steel........................................................................1171 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES...............................................................1171 Read the following precautions when repairing HSS:..........................................................1172 Replacement Operations..............................................................................................1174 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1174 HOODLEDGE.......................................................................................................1177 FRONT SIDE MEMBER...............................................................................................1179 FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT).........................................................................1181 FRONT PILLAR....................................................................................................1183 CENTER PILLAR...................................................................................................1185 OUTER SILL......................................................................................................1187 REAR FENDER.....................................................................................................1189 REAR PANEL......................................................................................................1191 REAR END CROSSMEMBER............................................................................................1193 REAR FLOOR REAR.................................................................................................1195 REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION......................................................................................1198 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 br..............................................................................................................................1201 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1201 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................1203 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1203 Precautions for Brake System........................................................................................1203 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................1204 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................1204 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................1205 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1205 BRAKE PEDAL.............................................................................................................1206 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................1206 PLAY AND CLEARANCE BETWEEN BRAKE PEDAL AND FLOOR PANEL WITH PEDAL DEPRESSED.....................................1206 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................1207 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1207 COMPONENT PARTS LOCATION........................................................................................1207 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1208 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1208 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1208 BRAKE FLUID.............................................................................................................1209 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1209 LEVEL CHECK.....................................................................................................1209 Drain and Refill....................................................................................................1209 Bleeding Brake System...............................................................................................1210 BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE...................................................................................................1211 Hydraulic Circuit...................................................................................................1211 Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose.......................................................1211 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1211 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1211 Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose........................................................1212 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1212 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1212 Inspection After Installation.......................................................................................1212 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER...................................................................................................1213 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1213 LEAK INSPECTION.................................................................................................1213 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1213 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1213 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1213 Components..........................................................................................................1213 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................1214 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1214 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1214 BRAKE BOOSTER...........................................................................................................1215 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................1215 OPERATING CHECK.................................................................................................1215 AIRTIGHT CHECK..................................................................................................1215 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1216 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1217 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1217 Output Rod Length Inspection................................................................................1217 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1217 VACUUM LINES............................................................................................................1218 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1218 Inspection..........................................................................................................1218 VISUAL INSPECTION...............................................................................................1218 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION..........................................................................................1219 Airtightness Inspection.....................................................................................1219 FRONT DISC BRAKE........................................................................................................1220 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1220 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1220 Components..........................................................................................................1220 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1221 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1221 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1221 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1221 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1221 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1221 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1222 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1222 CALIPER INSPECTION..............................................................................................1223 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1223 Torque Member...............................................................................................1223 Piston......................................................................................................1223 Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots.........................................................................1223 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1223 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1224 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1224 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1224 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1224 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE......................................................................................1224 REAR DISC BRAKE.........................................................................................................1225 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1225 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1225 Components..........................................................................................................1225 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1226 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1226 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1226 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1226 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1226 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1226 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1227 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1227 CALIPER INSPECTION..............................................................................................1227 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1227 Torque Member...............................................................................................1228 Piston......................................................................................................1228 Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots.....................................................................1228 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1228 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1229 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1229 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1229 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1229 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE......................................................................................1229 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................1231 General Specifications..............................................................................................1231 Brake Pedal.........................................................................................................1231 Brake Booster.......................................................................................................1231 Check Valve.........................................................................................................1231 Front Disc Brake....................................................................................................1231 Rear Disc Brake.....................................................................................................1232 brc.............................................................................................................................1233 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1233 VDC/TCS/ABS.............................................................................................................1235 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1235 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1235 Precautions for Brake System....................................................................................1235 Precautions for Brake Control...................................................................................1235 Diagnosis Precaution............................................................................................1236 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................1236 Precaution for Harness Repair...................................................................................1236 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................1236 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1237 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1237 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1237 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE..................................................................................................1238 Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position............................................................1238 Calibration of Decel G-sensor (AWD Model).......................................................................1238 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1240 System Diagram..................................................................................................1240 VDC Function....................................................................................................1240 TCS Function....................................................................................................1240 ABS Function....................................................................................................1240 EBD Function....................................................................................................1241 Fail-Safe Function..............................................................................................1241 VDC / TCS SYSTEM............................................................................................1241 ABS, EBD SYSTEM.............................................................................................1241 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram.......................................................................................1242 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................1243 System Description..............................................................................................1243 CAN Communication Unit..........................................................................................1243 TYPE 1/TYPE2................................................................................................1244 System Diagram..........................................................................................1244 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................1244 TYPE 3......................................................................................................1247 System Diagram..........................................................................................1247 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................1247 TYPE 4/TYPE5................................................................................................1250 System Diagram..........................................................................................1250 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................1251 TYPE 6......................................................................................................1253 System Diagram..........................................................................................1253 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................1254 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1257 How to Proceed With Diagnosis...................................................................................1257 BASIC CONCEPT...............................................................................................1257 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART.........................................................................................1258 ASKING COMPLAINTS...........................................................................................1259 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET..................................................................................1259 Component Installation Location.................................................................................1260 Schematic.......................................................................................................1261 Wiring Diagram — VDC —..........................................................................................1262 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard.......................................................................1268 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II.............................................................................1268 CONSULT-II Functions............................................................................................1270 CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION....................................................................................1270 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE........................................................................1271 SELF-DIAGNOSIS..............................................................................................1272 Description.............................................................................................1272 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1272 Display Item List.......................................................................................1273 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................1275 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1275 Display Item List.......................................................................................1276 ACTIVE TEST.................................................................................................1278 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1278 Solenoid Valve Operation Chart..........................................................................1278 ABS Motor...............................................................................................1279 For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis.................................................................................1280 PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................1280 ON and OFF Timing for ABS Warning Lamp, VDCOFF Indicator Lamp, SLIP Indicator Lamp, Brake Warnin.......1281 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1281 BASIC INSPECTION 1: BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT, LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION....................................1281 BASIC INSPECTION 2: POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION..................................1281 BASIC INSPECTION 3: ABS WARNING LAMP, VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP and BRAKE WARNI...........1282 Inspection 1: Wheel Sensor System...............................................................................1282 Inspection 2: Engine System.....................................................................................1285 Inspection 3: VDC/TCS/ABS Control Unit System...................................................................1285 Inspection 4: Pressure Sensor System............................................................................1285 Inspection 5: Steering Angle Sensor System......................................................................1287 Inspection 6: Yaw Rate/Side G-Sensor (2WD model), Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G- sensor (AWD models) System.............1289 Inspection 7: Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System.........................................................1291 Inspection 8: Actuator Motor System.............................................................................1292 Inspection 9: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Supply and Ground System......................1293 Inspection 10: Stop Lamp Switch System..........................................................................1295 Inspection 11: Brake Fluid Level Switch System..................................................................1296 Inspection 12: When “ST ANG SEN SIGNAL” Appears on Self-Diagnosis Results Display...............................1297 Inspection 13: When “DECEL G SEN SET” Appears on Self-Diagnosis Results Display (AWD Model).....................1297 Inspection 14: CAN Communication System.........................................................................1298 Component Inspection............................................................................................1298 VDC OFF SWITCH..............................................................................................1298 Symptom 1: Excessive ABS Function Operation Frequency...........................................................1298 Symptom 2: Unexpected Pedal Reaction............................................................................1299 Symptom 3: The Braking Distance Is Long.........................................................................1299 Symptom 4: The ABS Function Does Not Operate....................................................................1299 Symptom 5: Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Sound Occurs........................................................1300 Symptom 6: Vehicle Jerks During VDC/TCS/ABS Control.............................................................1300 WHEEL SENSORS.......................................................................................................1302 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1302 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1302 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1302 SENSOR ROTOR........................................................................................................1304 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1304 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1304 Front...................................................................................................1304 Rear....................................................................................................1304 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1304 Front...................................................................................................1304 Rear....................................................................................................1304 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)...............................................................................1305 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1305 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1305 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1305 G SENSOR............................................................................................................1307 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1307 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1307 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1307 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR...............................................................................................1308 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1308 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1308 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1308 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)............................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 98 co..............................................................................................................................1309 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1309 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1311 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1311 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1311 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................1311 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................1311 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................1311 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1313 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1313 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1314 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1315 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1315 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1317 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1317 System Drawing..................................................................................................1318 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1319 Inspection......................................................................................................1319 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1319 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS...........................................................................1319 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1319 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1319 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1320 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1321 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1322 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1322 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1322 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1323 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1323 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1323 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1324 Removal and Installation of Cooling Fan.........................................................................1324 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1324 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1324 Disassembly and Assembly of Cooling Fan.........................................................................1324 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1324 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1324 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1325 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1325 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1325 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1325 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1326 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1328 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1329 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1329 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1329 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1331 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1331 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1332 WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY.................................................................................1333 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1333 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1333 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1334 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1334 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1334 WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING.......................................................................................1335 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1335 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1335 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1335 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1335 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1336 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1336 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1336 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1336 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1336 VK45DE..................................................................................................................1337 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1337 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1337 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1338 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1338 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1338 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1339 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1339 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1341 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1341 System Drawing..................................................................................................1342 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1343 Inspection......................................................................................................1343 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1343 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS...........................................................................1343 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1343 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1343 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1344 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1345 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1346 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1346 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1346 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1348 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1348 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1348 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1348 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1349 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1349 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1349 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1349 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1350 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1352 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1353 Removal and Installation (Crankshaft Driven Type)...............................................................1353 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1353 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1353 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1353 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1353 Removal and Installation (Motor Driven Type)....................................................................1354 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1354 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1354 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY....................................................................................1354 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1354 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1354 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1355 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1355 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1355 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1355 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1356 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1356 THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................1357 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1357 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1357 Removal of Thermostat...................................................................................1357 Removal of Water Control Valve..........................................................................1357 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1358 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1358 Installation of Thermostat and Water Control Valve......................................................1358 Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe.......................................................1359 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1359 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1360 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1360 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1360 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1360 WATER CONTROL VALVE.........................................................................................1360 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1360 di..............................................................................................................................1361 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1361 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................1363 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1363 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................1363 COMBINATION METERS......................................................................................................1364 System Description..................................................................................................1364 UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT......................................................................................1364 Illumination Control........................................................................................1364 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.......................................................................................1364 HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER....................................................................1365 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1365 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE.........................................................................................1366 TACHOMETER......................................................................................................1366 FUEL GAUGE......................................................................................................1366 SPEEDOMETER.....................................................................................................1366 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1366 Combination Meter...................................................................................................1367 CHECK...........................................................................................................1367 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................1368 Wiring Diagram — METER —............................................................................................1369 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1371 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1372 Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter............................................................................1373 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.........................................................................................1373 HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE.................................................................................1373 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1373 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................1374 Diagnosis Flow......................................................................................................1374 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1375 Symptom Chart 1.....................................................................................................1377 Symptom Chart 2.....................................................................................................1378 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection.....................................................................................1378 Engine Speed Signal Inspection......................................................................................1380 Water Temperature Signal Inspection.................................................................................1381 Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 1...............................................................................1382 FUEL GAUGE......................................................................................................1382 Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 2...............................................................................1383 LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP...........................................................................................1383 CAN Communication System Inspection.................................................................................1384 Communication Line Inspection.......................................................................................1384 Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch Inspection...........................................................1386 Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicator Wrong Value or Varies......................................................1387 Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL position...........................................................................1387 Electrical Components Inspection....................................................................................1388 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT....................................................................................1388 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump (Main)...........................................................1388 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Pump (Main) Harness........................................................1388 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit (Sub)..........................................................................1388 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1388 COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY......................................................................................1388 Disassembly and Assembly for Combination Meter......................................................................1389 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1389 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1390 Removal and Installation of Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch..........................................1390 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1390 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1390 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP...............................................................................................1391 System Description..................................................................................................1391 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS............................................................................................1391 Between Unified Meter and A/C amp. and Combination Meter....................................................1391 FAIL-SAFE.......................................................................................................1392 Solution When Communication Error Between the Unified Meter & A/C Amp. and the Combination Meter............1392 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1393 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1393 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................1394 System Diagram..............................................................................................1394 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1394 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................1397 System Diagram..............................................................................................1397 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1397 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................1400 System Diagram..............................................................................................1400 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1401 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................1403 System Diagram..............................................................................................1403 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1404 Schematic...........................................................................................................1407 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1408 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1408 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................1409 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1409 Display Item List...........................................................................................1409 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1409 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1409 Display Item List...........................................................................................1410 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp...............................................................1411 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1411 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1411 COMPASS.................................................................................................................1412 System Description..................................................................................................1412 DIRECTION DISPLAY...............................................................................................1412 “C” is Displayed in the Compass Window......................................................................1413 Inaccurate Compass Direction................................................................................1413 Wiring Diagram – COMPAS –...........................................................................................1414 Removal and Installation of Compass.................................................................................1415 WARNING LAMPS...........................................................................................................1416 Schematic...........................................................................................................1416 Wiring Diagram — WARN —.............................................................................................1417 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)............................................................1425 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)................................................1426 Component Inspection................................................................................................1427 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.............................................................................................1427 A/T INDICATOR...........................................................................................................1428 Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —...........................................................................................1428 A/T Indicator Is Malfunction........................................................................................1430 WARNING CHIME...........................................................................................................1432 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1432 System Description..................................................................................................1432 FUNCTION........................................................................................................1432 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY)............................................................1433 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITH INTELLIGENT KEY)...............................................................1433 When Mechanical Key Is Used.................................................................................1433 When Intelligent Key Is Carried With The Driver.............................................................1433 LIGHT WARNING CHIME.............................................................................................1434 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................1434 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1435 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1435 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................1436 System Diagram..............................................................................................1436 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1436 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................1439 System Diagram..............................................................................................1439 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1439 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................1442 System Diagram..............................................................................................1442 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1443 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................1445 System Diagram..............................................................................................1445 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................1446 Schematic...........................................................................................................1449 Wiring Diagram — CHIME —............................................................................................1450 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1453 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1454 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1455 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................1455 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1456 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................1456 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1457 DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION....................................................................................1457 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................1457 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1458 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1458 Data Monitor Item...........................................................................................1458 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1458 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1458 Active Test Item............................................................................................1458 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................1458 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1458 Display Item List...........................................................................................1459 All Warnings Are Not Operated.......................................................................................1459 Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)...................1460 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Without Intelligent Key)........................................................1461 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (With Intelligent Key, When Mechanical Key Is Used)..............................1464 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (With Intelligent Key, When Intelligent Key Is Carried With Th...................1466 Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate................................................................................1468 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate............................................................................1468 CLOCK...................................................................................................................1470 Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —............................................................................................1470 Removal and Installation of Clock...................................................................................1471 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1471 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1471 REAR VIEW MONITOR.......................................................................................................1472 System Description..................................................................................................1472 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................1472 AV COMMUNICATION LINE...........................................................................................1472 REAR VIEW CAMERA OPERATION......................................................................................1472 Side Distance Guideline.....................................................................................1473 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1473 Schematic...........................................................................................................1474 Wiring Diagram — R/VIEW —...........................................................................................1475 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit.....................................................1478 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1479 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1479 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1480 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1480 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1480 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1480 Display Item List...........................................................................................1480 Side Distance Guideline Correction..................................................................................1481 SIDE DISTANCE GUIDELINE CORRECTION PROCEDURE....................................................................1481 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1483 Rear View Is Not Displayed With The A/T Selector Lever In R-position................................................1484 The Rear View Image Is Distorted....................................................................................1489 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera Control Unit...........................................................1490 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1490 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1490 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera........................................................................1490 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1490 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1490 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 ec..............................................................................................................................1491 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1491 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1505 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................1505 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................1505 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................1509 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1513 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1513 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................1513 Precaution......................................................................................................1513 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...........................................................................1516 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1517 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1517 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1518 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................1519 System Diagram..................................................................................................1519 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................1520 System Chart....................................................................................................1521 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................1522 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1522 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1522 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................1522 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................1523 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................1523 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................1523 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................1524 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................1524 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................1524 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................1524 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................1524 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1524 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1524 Air Conditioning Cut Control....................................................................................1525 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1525 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1525 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................1525 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1525 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1525 CAN Communication...............................................................................................1527 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1527 2WD MODELS WITHOUT ICC......................................................................................1527 System Diagram..........................................................................................1527 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................1528 2WD MODELS WITH ICC.........................................................................................1530 System Diagram..........................................................................................1530 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................1530 AWD MODELS WITHOUT ICC......................................................................................1533 System Diagram..........................................................................................1533 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................1534 AWD MODELS WITH ICC.........................................................................................1536 System Diagram..........................................................................................1536 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................1537 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1540 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................1540 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................1540 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1540 With GST................................................................................................1540 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................1540 Method A................................................................................................1540 Method B................................................................................................1541 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment........................................................1541 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1541 OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE.................................................................................1543 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1544 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................1553 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1553 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1553 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................1553 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1553 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1553 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................1553 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1553 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1553 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1554 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1554 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1554 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................1555 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................1555 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................1555 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1556 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1556 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................1556 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................1557 Introduction....................................................................................................1557 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................1557 Emission-related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................1558 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................1558 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................1561 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................1562 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................1562 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................1563 SRT Item................................................................................................1564 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................1564 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................1565 How to Display SRT Code.................................................................................1566 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................1567 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................1568 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................1569 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................1570 How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II).....................................................................1570 With GST................................................................................................1571 No Tools................................................................................................1571 IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)...............................................................1572 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................1572 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1572 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................1573 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................1573 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................1574 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)............................................1574 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor).....................................1574 How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa......................................1574 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................1574 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................1575 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................1575 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................1575 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................1575 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR....................................................1575 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................1576 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................1576 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................1576 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........1577 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........1578 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1578 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................1578 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................1579 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................1580 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................1580 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1580 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1581 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................1581 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................1581 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................1582 Flow Chart..............................................................................................1582 Description for Work Flow...............................................................................1583 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................1583 Description.............................................................................................1583 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................1584 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................1584 Fail-safe Chart.................................................................................................1586 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1587 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................1592 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................1592 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................1593 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................1596 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................1602 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................1604 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................1604 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1604 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................1604 CONSULT-II Function.............................................................................................1613 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1613 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................1614 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.............................................................................1615 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................1616 Work Item...............................................................................................1616 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................1617 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................1617 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................1617 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................1617 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1617 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................1621 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1621 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................1622 Test Item...............................................................................................1622 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................1623 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................1623 SRT Work Support Mode...................................................................................1623 DTC Work Support Mode...................................................................................1623 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................1624 Description.............................................................................................1624 Operation...............................................................................................1625 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................1625 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1625 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1626 GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE....................................................................................1626 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................1628 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................1632 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................1632 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.................................1632 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................1634 Description.....................................................................................................1634 Testing Condition...............................................................................................1634 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................1634 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1635 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................1638 Description.....................................................................................................1638 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1638 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM........................................................................................1639 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1639 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1640 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................1644 Description.....................................................................................................1644 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1644 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1644 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1645 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1646 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................1647 Description.....................................................................................................1647 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1647 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1647 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1648 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1648 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1648 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1648 WITH GST....................................................................................................1649 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1650 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER.........................................................................1651 Description.....................................................................................................1651 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1651 OPERATION...................................................................................................1651 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1651 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1651 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1652 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1652 WITH GST....................................................................................................1652 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1653 BANK 1......................................................................................................1653 BANK 2......................................................................................................1655 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1656 Component Inspection............................................................................................1658 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER...............................................................................1658 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1658 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1658 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................1659 Description.....................................................................................................1659 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1659 OPERATION...................................................................................................1659 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1659 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1659 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1660 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1660 WITH GST....................................................................................................1660 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1661 BANK 1......................................................................................................1661 BANK 2......................................................................................................1663 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1664 Component Inspection............................................................................................1665 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................1665 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1666 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1666 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................1667 Component Description...........................................................................................1667 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1667 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1667 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1668 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1668 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1668 With GST................................................................................................1668 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1668 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1668 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1669 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1669 With GST................................................................................................1669 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1670 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1671 Component Inspection............................................................................................1674 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1674 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1674 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1674 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................1675 Component Description...........................................................................................1675 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1675 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1675 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1675 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1676 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................1676 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1676 With GST................................................................................................1676 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................1676 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1676 With GST................................................................................................1676 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1677 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1678 Component Inspection............................................................................................1681 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1681 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1681 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1681 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................1682 Component Description...........................................................................................1682 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1682 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1682 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1682 WITH GST....................................................................................................1683 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1684 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1685 Component Inspection............................................................................................1686 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1686 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1686 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1686 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................1687 Component Description...........................................................................................1687 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1687 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1687 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1688 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1688 WITH GST....................................................................................................1688 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1689 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1690 Component Inspection............................................................................................1691 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1691 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1691 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1691 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1692 Component Description...........................................................................................1692 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1692 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1692 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1692 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1693 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1693 WITH GST....................................................................................................1693 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1694 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1695 Component Inspection............................................................................................1698 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1698 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1698 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1698 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................1699 Component Description...........................................................................................1699 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1699 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1700 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1700 WITH GST....................................................................................................1700 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1700 Component Inspection............................................................................................1701 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1701 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1701 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1701 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................1702 Component Description...........................................................................................1702 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1702 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1702 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1702 WITH GST....................................................................................................1703 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1703 Component Inspection............................................................................................1703 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1703 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1703 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1703 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................1704 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1704 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1704 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1704 WITH GST....................................................................................................1704 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1704 Component Inspection............................................................................................1705 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1705 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1705 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1705 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1..............................................................................................1706 Component Description...........................................................................................1706 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1706 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1706 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1707 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1707 WITH GST....................................................................................................1707 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1708 BANK 1......................................................................................................1708 BANK 2......................................................................................................1710 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1711 Component Inspection............................................................................................1713 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1713 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1713 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1714 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1714 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1714 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1..............................................................................................1715 Component Description...........................................................................................1715 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1715 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1715 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1716 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1716 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1717 WITH GST....................................................................................................1717 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1718 BANK 1......................................................................................................1718 BANK 2......................................................................................................1720 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1721 Component Inspection............................................................................................1725 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1725 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1725 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1726 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1726 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1726 DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1..............................................................................................1727 Component Description...........................................................................................1727 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1727 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1727 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1728 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1728 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1729 WITH GST....................................................................................................1729 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1730 BANK 1......................................................................................................1730 BANK 2......................................................................................................1732 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1733 Component Inspection............................................................................................1734 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1734 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1734 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1735 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1736 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1736 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................1737 Component Description...........................................................................................1737 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1737 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1737 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1738 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1738 WITH GST....................................................................................................1738 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1739 BANK 1......................................................................................................1739 BANK 2......................................................................................................1741 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1742 Component Inspection............................................................................................1744 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1744 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1744 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1744 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1745 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1745 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................1746 Component Description...........................................................................................1746 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1746 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1746 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1747 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1747 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1747 WITH GST....................................................................................................1747 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1749 BANK 1......................................................................................................1749 BANK 2......................................................................................................1751 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1752 Component Inspection............................................................................................1754 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1754 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1754 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1755 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1756 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1756 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1757 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1757 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1757 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1757 WITH GST....................................................................................................1758 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1759 BANK 1......................................................................................................1759 BANK 2......................................................................................................1760 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1761 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1765 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1765 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1765 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1765 WITH GST....................................................................................................1766 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1767 BANK 1......................................................................................................1767 BANK 2......................................................................................................1768 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1769 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................1773 Component Description...........................................................................................1773 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1773 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1773 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1773 WITH GST....................................................................................................1774 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1775 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1776 Component Inspection............................................................................................1777 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1777 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1777 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1777 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................1778 Component Description...........................................................................................1778 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1778 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1778 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1778 WITH GST....................................................................................................1778 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1779 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1780 Component Inspection............................................................................................1781 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1781 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1781 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1781 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1782 Component Description...........................................................................................1782 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1782 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1782 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1782 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1783 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1783 WITH GST....................................................................................................1783 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1784 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1785 Component Inspection............................................................................................1788 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1788 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1788 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1788 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................1789 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1789 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1789 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1790 WITH GST....................................................................................................1790 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1790 DTC P0327, P0328 KS.................................................................................................1795 Component Description...........................................................................................1795 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1795 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1795 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1795 WITH GST....................................................................................................1795 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1796 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1797 Component Inspection............................................................................................1798 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1798 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1798 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1798 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................1799 Component Description...........................................................................................1799 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1799 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1799 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1799 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1799 WITH GST....................................................................................................1799 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1800 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1801 Component Inspection............................................................................................1804 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1804 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1804 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1804 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE).................................................................................1805 Component Description...........................................................................................1805 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1805 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1805 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1805 WITH GST....................................................................................................1805 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1806 BANK 1......................................................................................................1806 BANK 2......................................................................................................1808 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1809 Component Inspection............................................................................................1812 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1812 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1812 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1812 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................1813 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1813 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1813 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1813 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1814 WITH GST....................................................................................................1814 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1815 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1818 System Description..............................................................................................1818 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1818 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1818 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1819 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1819 WITH GST....................................................................................................1819 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1820 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1823 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1823 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1824 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1824 WITH GST....................................................................................................1825 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1826 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................1833 Description.....................................................................................................1833 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1833 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1833 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1833 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1834 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1834 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1834 WITH GST....................................................................................................1834 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1835 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1837 Component Inspection............................................................................................1838 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1838 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1838 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1838 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1839 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1839 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1840 Component Description...........................................................................................1840 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1840 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1840 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1841 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1841 WITH GST....................................................................................................1841 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1842 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1843 Component Inspection............................................................................................1845 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1845 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1845 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1846 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1847 Component Description...........................................................................................1847 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1847 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1847 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1848 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1848 WITH GST....................................................................................................1848 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1848 Component Inspection............................................................................................1849 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1849 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1850 Component Description...........................................................................................1850 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1850 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1850 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1851 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1851 WITH GST....................................................................................................1851 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1852 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1853 Component Inspection............................................................................................1855 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1855 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1856 Component Description...........................................................................................1856 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1856 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1856 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1857 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1857 WITH GST....................................................................................................1857 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1858 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1859 Component Inspection............................................................................................1863 EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR................................................................................1863 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1864 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1864 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1865 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1865 WITH GST....................................................................................................1866 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1866 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1872 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1872 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1873 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1874 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1874 WITH GST....................................................................................................1874 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1875 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1882 Component Description...........................................................................................1882 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1882 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1882 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1882 WITH GST....................................................................................................1882 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1883 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1883 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1883 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1884 Component Description...........................................................................................1884 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1884 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1884 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1884 WITH GST....................................................................................................1885 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1885 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1885 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1885 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR..................................................................................1886 Component Description...........................................................................................1886 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1886 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1886 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1886 WITH GST....................................................................................................1886 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1887 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1887 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1887 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................1888 Description.....................................................................................................1888 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1888 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1888 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1888 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1888 WITH GST....................................................................................................1889 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1889 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1890 Description.....................................................................................................1890 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1890 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1890 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1890 WITH GST....................................................................................................1890 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1891 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1892 Description.....................................................................................................1892 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1892 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1892 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1892 WITH GST....................................................................................................1892 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1893 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................1894 Component Description...........................................................................................1894 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1894 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1894 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1894 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1894 WITH GST....................................................................................................1894 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1895 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1896 Component Inspection............................................................................................1898 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1898 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1898 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1898 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................1899 Component Description...........................................................................................1899 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1899 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1899 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1899 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1899 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1899 With GST................................................................................................1899 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1900 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1900 With GST................................................................................................1900 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1900 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1900 With GST................................................................................................1900 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1900 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................1902 Component Description...........................................................................................1902 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1902 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1902 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1902 WITH GST....................................................................................................1902 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1903 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1904 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................1906 Component Description...........................................................................................1906 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1906 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1906 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1906 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1906 WITH GST....................................................................................................1906 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1907 BANK 1......................................................................................................1907 BANK 2......................................................................................................1909 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1910 Component Inspection............................................................................................1912 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1912 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1912 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1912 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................1913 Component Description...........................................................................................1913 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1913 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1913 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1913 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................1913 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1913 With GST................................................................................................1913 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1914 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1914 With GST................................................................................................1914 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1914 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................1915 Description.....................................................................................................1915 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1915 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1915 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1915 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1915 WITH GST....................................................................................................1915 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1916 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1917 Component Inspection............................................................................................1920 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1920 Remove and Installation.........................................................................................1920 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1920 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................1921 Component Description...........................................................................................1921 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1921 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1921 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1921 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1921 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124.....................................................................................1921 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1921 With GST................................................................................................1922 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126.....................................................................................1922 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1922 With GST................................................................................................1922 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1923 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1924 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................1926 Component Description...........................................................................................1926 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1926 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1926 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1926 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1926 WITH GST....................................................................................................1926 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1927 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1928 Component Inspection............................................................................................1929 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1929 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1930 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1930 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1..............................................................................................1931 Component Description...........................................................................................1931 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1931 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1931 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1932 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1932 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1933 WITH GST....................................................................................................1933 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1933 Component Inspection............................................................................................1935 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1935 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1935 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1936 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1936 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1936 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1..............................................................................................1937 Component Description...........................................................................................1937 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1937 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1937 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1938 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1938 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1939 WITH GST....................................................................................................1939 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1939 Component Inspection............................................................................................1941 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1941 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1941 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1942 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1943 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1943 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2..............................................................................................1944 Component Description...........................................................................................1944 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1944 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1944 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1945 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1945 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1945 WITH GST....................................................................................................1945 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1947 BANK 1......................................................................................................1947 BANK 2......................................................................................................1949 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1950 Component Inspection............................................................................................1952 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1952 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1952 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1953 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1954 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1954 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2..............................................................................................1955 Component Description...........................................................................................1955 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1955 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1955 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1956 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1956 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1956 WITH GST....................................................................................................1956 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1958 BANK 1......................................................................................................1958 BANK 2......................................................................................................1960 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1961 Component Inspection............................................................................................1963 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1963 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1963 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1964 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1965 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1965 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................1966 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1966 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1966 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1966 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1966 WITH GST....................................................................................................1967 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1967 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................1968 Description.....................................................................................................1968 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1968 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1968 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1968 WITH GST....................................................................................................1968 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1968 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................1969 Description.....................................................................................................1969 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1969 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1969 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1969 WITH GST....................................................................................................1969 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1969 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................1970 Description.....................................................................................................1970 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1970 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................1970 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................1970 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................1971 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1971 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................1971 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1971 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1971 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1972 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1972 WITH GST....................................................................................................1973 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1974 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1976 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................1976 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................1978 Main 12 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................1981 Component Inspection............................................................................................1982 COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2.................................................................................1982 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1983 Component Description...........................................................................................1983 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1983 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1983 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1983 WITH GST....................................................................................................1983 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1984 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1984 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1984 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1985 Component Description...........................................................................................1985 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1985 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1985 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1985 WITH GST....................................................................................................1985 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1986 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1986 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1986 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................1987 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1987 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1987 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1987 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1987 WITH GST....................................................................................................1987 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1988 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1989 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................1992 Description.....................................................................................................1992 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1992 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1992 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1992 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1993 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1993 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1993 WITH GST....................................................................................................1993 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1994 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1996 Component Inspection............................................................................................1999 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1999 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1999 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1999 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1999 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1999 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2000 Component Description...........................................................................................2000 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2000 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2000 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2001 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2001 WITH GST....................................................................................................2001 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2002 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2003 Component Inspection............................................................................................2004 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2004 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2004 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2005 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................2006 Component Description...........................................................................................2006 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2006 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2006 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2006 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2007 WITH GST....................................................................................................2007 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2008 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2010 Component Inspection............................................................................................2012 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................2012 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................2013 Component Description...........................................................................................2013 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2013 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2013 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2014 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2014 WITH GST....................................................................................................2014 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2015 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2017 Component Inspection............................................................................................2018 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2018 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................2019 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2019 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2019 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2019 WITH GST....................................................................................................2019 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2019 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................2020 Component Description...........................................................................................2020 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2020 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2020 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2020 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2021 WITH GST....................................................................................................2021 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2022 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2023 Component Inspection............................................................................................2028 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2028 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2028 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2029 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................2030 Component Description...........................................................................................2030 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2030 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2030 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2031 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2031 WITH GST....................................................................................................2031 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2032 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2033 Component Inspection............................................................................................2037 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2037 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2037 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................2038 Component Description...........................................................................................2038 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2038 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2038 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2038 WITH GST....................................................................................................2038 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2039 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................2040 Component Description...........................................................................................2040 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2040 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2040 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2040 WITH GST....................................................................................................2040 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2041 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................2042 Component Description...........................................................................................2042 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2042 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2042 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2042 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2042 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2043 WITH GST....................................................................................................2043 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2044 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2045 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................2047 Description.....................................................................................................2047 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2047 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2047 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2047 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2047 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2047 WITH GST....................................................................................................2047 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2048 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2049 Component Inspection............................................................................................2051 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2051 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2052 Component Description...........................................................................................2052 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2052 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2052 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2052 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2053 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2053 WITH GST....................................................................................................2053 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2054 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2055 Component Inspection............................................................................................2057 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2057 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2058 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2058 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2059 Component Description...........................................................................................2059 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2059 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2059 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2059 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2060 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2060 WITH GST....................................................................................................2060 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2061 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2062 Component Inspection............................................................................................2065 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2065 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2065 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2065 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2066 Component Description...........................................................................................2066 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2066 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2066 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2066 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2067 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2067 WITH GST....................................................................................................2067 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2068 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2069 Component Inspection............................................................................................2072 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2072 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2072 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2072 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................2073 Component Description...........................................................................................2073 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2073 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2073 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2073 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2074 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2074 WITH GST....................................................................................................2074 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2075 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2076 Component Inspection............................................................................................2080 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2080 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2080 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2080 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2081 Component Description...........................................................................................2081 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2081 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2082 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2087 Component Inspection............................................................................................2091 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2091 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2092 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2092 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2092 INJECTOR CIRCUIT....................................................................................................2093 Component Description...........................................................................................2093 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2093 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2094 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2095 Component Inspection............................................................................................2098 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2098 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2098 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2098 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT...................................................................................................2099 Description.....................................................................................................2099 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2099 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2099 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2099 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2100 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2101 Component Inspection............................................................................................2104 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2104 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2104 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2105 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2105 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2106 Component Description...........................................................................................2106 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2107 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2108 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2110 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2110 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2111 Description.....................................................................................................2111 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2111 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2111 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2112 Component Description...........................................................................................2112 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2112 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2113 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2114 Component Inspection............................................................................................2120 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2120 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2120 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2120 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2121 Component Description...........................................................................................2121 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2121 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2122 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2123 Component Inspection............................................................................................2127 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2127 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2127 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2128 Component Description...........................................................................................2128 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2128 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2129 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2130 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2131 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2131 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................2133 Description.....................................................................................................2133 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2133 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................2134 Component Inspection............................................................................................2136 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2136 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)..................................................2136 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2136 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2136 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2136 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2136 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................2137 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2137 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2137 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2137 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................2137 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2138 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................2138 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................2140 System Description..............................................................................................2140 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2141 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................2141 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................2142 Component Inspection............................................................................................2143 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................2143 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2143 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2144 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................2145 Description.....................................................................................................2145 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2145 Component Inspection............................................................................................2145 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................2145 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................2146 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................2147 System Description..............................................................................................2147 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2147 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................2147 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................2147 ACCEL OPERATION.............................................................................................2147 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................2147 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................2147 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................2148 Component Description...........................................................................................2149 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2149 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2149 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2149 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2149 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................2149 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2150 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2150 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2150 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2150 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2150 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2150 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2150 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater...................................................................................2150 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2150 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2150 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2150 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2150 Injector........................................................................................................2151 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2151 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2152 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................2152 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................2152 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................2156 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2160 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................2160 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................2160 Precaution......................................................................................................2160 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...........................................................................2163 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2164 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2164 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2165 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................2166 System Diagram..................................................................................................2166 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................2167 System Chart....................................................................................................2168 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................2169 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2169 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2169 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................2169 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................2170 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................2170 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................2170 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................2171 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................2171 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................2171 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................2171 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................2171 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2171 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2171 Nissan Torque Demand (NTD) Control System.......................................................................2172 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2172 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2172 Air Conditioning Cut Control....................................................................................2173 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2173 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2173 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................2173 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2173 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2173 CAN Communication...............................................................................................2174 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2174 MODELS WITHOUT ICC..........................................................................................2174 System Diagram..........................................................................................2174 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................2175 MODELS WITH ICC.............................................................................................2177 System Diagram..........................................................................................2177 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................2177 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................2181 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................2181 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................2181 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2181 With GST................................................................................................2181 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................2181 Method A................................................................................................2181 Method B................................................................................................2181 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment........................................................2182 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2182 OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE.................................................................................2183 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2184 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................2193 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2193 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2193 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................2193 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2193 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2193 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................2193 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2193 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2193 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2194 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2194 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2194 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................2195 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................2195 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................2195 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2195 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2196 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................2196 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................2198 Introduction....................................................................................................2198 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................2198 Emission-related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................2199 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................2199 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................2202 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................2203 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................2203 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................2204 SRT Item................................................................................................2205 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................2205 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................2206 How to Display SRT Code.................................................................................2207 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................2208 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................2209 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................2210 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................2211 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................2211 IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)...............................................................2213 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................2213 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2213 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................2214 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................2214 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................2215 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)............................................2215 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor).....................................2215 How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa......................................2215 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2215 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................2216 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................2216 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................2216 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2216 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR....................................................2216 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................2217 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................2217 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................2217 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........2218 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........2219 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2219 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................2219 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................2220 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................2221 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................2221 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2221 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................2222 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................2222 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................2222 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................2223 Flow Chart..............................................................................................2223 Description for Work Flow...............................................................................2224 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................2224 Description.............................................................................................2224 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................2225 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................2225 Fail-safe Chart.................................................................................................2227 Basic Inspection................................................................................................2229 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................2234 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................2234 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................2236 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................2238 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................2244 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................2246 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................2246 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2246 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................2246 CONSULT-II Function.............................................................................................2255 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2255 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................2256 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2257 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................2258 Work Item...............................................................................................2258 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................2259 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................2259 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................2259 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................2260 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2260 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................2264 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2264 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................2264 Test Item...............................................................................................2264 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................2265 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................2265 SRT Work Support Mode...................................................................................2265 DTC Work Support Mode...................................................................................2265 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................2266 Description.............................................................................................2266 Operation...............................................................................................2267 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................2267 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2267 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2268 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2268 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................2270 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................2274 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................2274 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.................................2274 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................2276 Description.....................................................................................................2276 Testing Condition...............................................................................................2276 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................2276 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2277 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................2280 Description.....................................................................................................2280 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2280 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM........................................................................................2281 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2281 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2282 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................2286 Description.....................................................................................................2286 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2286 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2286 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2287 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2288 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................2289 Description.....................................................................................................2289 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2289 COMPONENT INSPECTION........................................................................................2289 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve..............................................................2289 Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor.............................................................2290 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2290 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2290 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2290 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2291 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2291 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2291 With GST................................................................................................2291 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2291 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2291 With GST................................................................................................2291 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2292 BANK 1......................................................................................................2292 BANK 2......................................................................................................2294 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2296 Component Inspection............................................................................................2299 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2299 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2299 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2299 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2299 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2299 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER.........................................................................2300 Description.....................................................................................................2300 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2300 OPERATION...................................................................................................2300 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2300 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2300 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2301 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2301 WITH GST....................................................................................................2301 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2302 BANK 1......................................................................................................2302 BANK 2......................................................................................................2304 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2305 Component Inspection............................................................................................2307 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER...............................................................................2307 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2307 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2307 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................2308 Description.....................................................................................................2308 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2308 OPERATION...................................................................................................2308 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2308 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2308 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2309 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2309 WITH GST....................................................................................................2309 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2310 BANK 1......................................................................................................2310 BANK 2......................................................................................................2312 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2313 Component Inspection............................................................................................2315 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................2315 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2315 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2315 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................2316 Component Description...........................................................................................2316 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2316 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2316 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2317 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2317 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2317 With GST................................................................................................2317 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2317 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2317 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2318 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2318 With GST................................................................................................2318 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2319 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2320 Component Inspection............................................................................................2323 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2323 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2323 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2323 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................2324 Component Description...........................................................................................2324 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2324 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2324 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2324 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2325 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................2325 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2325 With GST................................................................................................2325 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................2325 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2325 With GST................................................................................................2325 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2326 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2327 Component Inspection............................................................................................2330 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2330 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2330 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2330 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................2331 Component Description...........................................................................................2331 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2331 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2331 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2331 WITH GST....................................................................................................2331 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2332 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2333 Component Inspection............................................................................................2334 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2334 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2334 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2334 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................2335 Component Description...........................................................................................2335 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2335 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2335 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2336 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2336 WITH GST....................................................................................................2336 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2337 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2338 Component Inspection............................................................................................2339 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2339 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2339 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2339 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2340 Component Description...........................................................................................2340 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2340 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2340 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2340 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2341 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2341 WITH GST....................................................................................................2341 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2342 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2343 Component Inspection............................................................................................2346 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2346 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2346 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2346 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................2347 Component Description...........................................................................................2347 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2347 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2348 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2348 WITH GST....................................................................................................2348 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2348 Component Inspection............................................................................................2349 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2349 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2349 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2349 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................2350 Component Description...........................................................................................2350 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2350 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2350 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2350 WITH GST....................................................................................................2351 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2351 Component Inspection............................................................................................2351 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2351 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2351 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2351 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................2352 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2352 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2352 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2352 WITH GST....................................................................................................2352 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2352 Component Inspection............................................................................................2353 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2353 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2353 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2353 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1..............................................................................................2354 Component Description...........................................................................................2354 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2354 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2354 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2355 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2355 WITH GST....................................................................................................2355 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2356 BANK 1......................................................................................................2356 BANK 2......................................................................................................2358 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2359 Component Inspection............................................................................................2361 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2361 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2361 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2362 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2362 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2362 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1..............................................................................................2363 Component Description...........................................................................................2363 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2363 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2363 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2364 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2364 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2365 WITH GST....................................................................................................2365 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2366 BANK 1......................................................................................................2366 BANK 2......................................................................................................2368 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2369 Component Inspection............................................................................................2373 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2373 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2373 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2375 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2375 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2375 DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1..............................................................................................2376 Component Description...........................................................................................2376 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2376 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2376 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2377 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2377 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2378 WITH GST....................................................................................................2378 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2379 BANK 1......................................................................................................2379 BANK 2......................................................................................................2381 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2382 Component Inspection............................................................................................2383 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2383 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2383 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2384 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2385 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2385 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................2386 Component Description...........................................................................................2386 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2386 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2386 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2387 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2387 WITH GST....................................................................................................2387 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2388 BANK 1......................................................................................................2388 BANK 2......................................................................................................2390 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2391 Component Inspection............................................................................................2393 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2393 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2393 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2394 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2394 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2394 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................2395 Component Description...........................................................................................2395 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2395 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2395 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2396 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2396 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2396 WITH GST....................................................................................................2396 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2398 BANK 1......................................................................................................2398 BANK 2......................................................................................................2400 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2401 Component Inspection............................................................................................2404 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2404 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2404 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2405 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2405 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2405 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2406 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2406 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2406 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2406 WITH GST....................................................................................................2407 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2408 BANK 1......................................................................................................2408 BANK 2......................................................................................................2409 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2410 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2415 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2415 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2415 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2415 WITH GST....................................................................................................2416 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2417 BANK 1......................................................................................................2417 BANK 2......................................................................................................2418 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2419 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................2423 Component Description...........................................................................................2423 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2423 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2423 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2423 WITH GST....................................................................................................2424 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2425 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2426 Component Inspection............................................................................................2427 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2427 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2427 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2427 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................2428 Component Description...........................................................................................2428 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2428 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2428 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2428 WITH GST....................................................................................................2428 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2429 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2430 Component Inspection............................................................................................2431 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2431 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2431 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2431 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2432 Component Description...........................................................................................2432 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2432 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2432 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2432 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2433 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2433 WITH GST....................................................................................................2433 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2434 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2435 Component Inspection............................................................................................2438 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2438 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2438 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2438 DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................2439 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2439 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2439 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2440 WITH GST....................................................................................................2440 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2440 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS...................................................................................2445 Component Description...........................................................................................2445 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2445 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2445 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2445 With GST....................................................................................................2445 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2446 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2447 Component Inspection............................................................................................2448 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2448 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2448 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2448 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................2449 Component Description...........................................................................................2449 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2449 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2449 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2449 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2449 WITH GST....................................................................................................2449 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2450 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2451 Component Inspection............................................................................................2454 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2454 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2454 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2454 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)....................................................................2455 Component Description...........................................................................................2455 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2455 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2455 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2455 WITH GST....................................................................................................2455 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2456 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2457 Component Inspection............................................................................................2460 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2460 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2460 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2460 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................2461 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2461 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2461 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2461 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2462 WITH GST....................................................................................................2462 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2463 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2466 System Description..............................................................................................2466 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2466 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2466 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2467 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2467 WITH GST....................................................................................................2467 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2468 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2471 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2471 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2472 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2472 WITH GST....................................................................................................2472 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2473 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................2480 Description.....................................................................................................2480 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2480 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2480 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2480 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2481 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2481 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2481 WITH GST....................................................................................................2481 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2482 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2484 Component Inspection............................................................................................2485 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2485 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2485 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2485 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2486 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2486 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2487 Component Description...........................................................................................2487 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2487 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2487 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2488 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2488 WITH GST....................................................................................................2488 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2489 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2490 Component Inspection............................................................................................2492 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2492 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2492 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2493 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2494 Component Description...........................................................................................2494 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2494 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2494 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2495 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2495 WITH GST....................................................................................................2495 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2495 Component Inspection............................................................................................2496 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2496 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2497 Component Description...........................................................................................2497 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2497 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2497 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2498 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2498 WITH GST....................................................................................................2498 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2499 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2500 Component Inspection............................................................................................2502 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2502 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2503 Component Description...........................................................................................2503 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2503 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2503 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2504 With CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2504 With GST....................................................................................................2504 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2505 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2506 Component Inspection............................................................................................2509 EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR................................................................................2509 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2511 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2511 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2512 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2512 WITH GST....................................................................................................2513 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2513 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2519 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2519 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2520 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2521 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2521 WITH GST....................................................................................................2521 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2522 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2529 Component Description...........................................................................................2529 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2529 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2529 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2529 WITH GST....................................................................................................2529 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2530 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2530 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2530 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2531 Component Description...........................................................................................2531 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2531 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2531 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2531 WITH GST....................................................................................................2532 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2532 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2532 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2532 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT..........................................................................2533 Component Description...........................................................................................2533 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2533 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2533 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2533 WITH GST....................................................................................................2533 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2534 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2534 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2534 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................2535 Description.....................................................................................................2535 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2535 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2535 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2535 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2535 WITH GST....................................................................................................2536 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2536 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2537 Description.....................................................................................................2537 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2537 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2537 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2537 WITH GST....................................................................................................2537 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2538 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2539 Description.....................................................................................................2539 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2539 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2539 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2539 WITH GST....................................................................................................2539 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2540 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................2541 Component Description...........................................................................................2541 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2541 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2541 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2541 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2541 WITH GST....................................................................................................2541 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2542 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2543 Component Inspection............................................................................................2545 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2545 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................2546 Component Description...........................................................................................2546 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2546 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2546 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2546 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2546 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2546 With GST................................................................................................2546 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2547 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2547 With GST................................................................................................2547 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2547 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2547 With GST................................................................................................2547 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2547 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................2549 Component Description...........................................................................................2549 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2549 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2549 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2549 WITH GST....................................................................................................2549 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2550 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2551 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................2553 Component Description...........................................................................................2553 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2553 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2553 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2553 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2554 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2554 WITH GST....................................................................................................2554 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2555 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2556 Component Inspection............................................................................................2559 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2559 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2559 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2559 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................2560 Component Description...........................................................................................2560 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2560 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2560 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2560 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2560 WITH GST....................................................................................................2560 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2561 BANK 1......................................................................................................2561 BANK 2......................................................................................................2563 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2564 Component Inspection............................................................................................2566 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2566 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2566 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2566 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................2567 Component Description...........................................................................................2567 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2567 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2567 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2567 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................2567 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2567 With GST................................................................................................2567 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2568 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2568 With GST................................................................................................2568 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2568 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................2569 Description.....................................................................................................2569 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2569 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2569 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2569 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2569 WITH GST....................................................................................................2569 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2570 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2571 Component Inspection............................................................................................2574 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2574 Remove and Installation.........................................................................................2574 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2574 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................2575 Component Description...........................................................................................2575 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2575 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2575 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2575 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2575 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124.....................................................................................2575 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2575 With GST................................................................................................2576 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126.....................................................................................2576 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2576 With GST................................................................................................2576 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2577 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2578 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................2580 Component Description...........................................................................................2580 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2580 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2580 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2580 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2580 WITH GST....................................................................................................2580 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2581 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2582 Component Inspection............................................................................................2583 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2583 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2584 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2584 DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR........................................................................2585 Component Description...........................................................................................2585 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2585 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2585 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2585 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2585 WITH GST....................................................................................................2585 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2586 BANK 1......................................................................................................2586 BANK 2......................................................................................................2588 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2589 Component Inspection............................................................................................2591 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2591 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2592 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2592 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1..............................................................................................2593 Component Description...........................................................................................2593 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2593 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2593 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2594 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2594 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2595 WITH GST....................................................................................................2595 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2595 Component Inspection............................................................................................2597 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2597 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2597 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2598 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2598 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2598 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1..............................................................................................2599 Component Description...........................................................................................2599 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2599 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2599 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2600 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2600 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2601 WITH GST....................................................................................................2601 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2601 Component Inspection............................................................................................2603 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2603 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2603 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2604 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2605 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2605 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2..............................................................................................2606 Component Description...........................................................................................2606 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2606 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2606 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2607 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2607 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2607 WITH GST....................................................................................................2607 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2609 BANK 1......................................................................................................2609 BANK 2......................................................................................................2611 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2612 Component Inspection............................................................................................2615 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2615 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2615 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2616 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2616 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2616 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2..............................................................................................2617 Component Description...........................................................................................2617 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2617 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2617 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2618 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2618 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2618 WITH GST....................................................................................................2618 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2620 BANK 1......................................................................................................2620 BANK 2......................................................................................................2622 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2623 Component Inspection............................................................................................2626 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2626 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2626 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2627 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2627 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2627 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................2628 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2628 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2628 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2628 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2628 WITH GST....................................................................................................2629 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2629 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................2630 Description.....................................................................................................2630 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2630 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2630 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2630 WITH GST....................................................................................................2630 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2630 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................2631 Description.....................................................................................................2631 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2631 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2631 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2631 WITH GST....................................................................................................2631 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2631 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................2632 System Description..............................................................................................2632 COOLING FAN CONTROL.........................................................................................2632 OPERATION...................................................................................................2632 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2633 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2633 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2633 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2633 WITH GST....................................................................................................2634 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2635 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2637 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................2639 Main 12 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................2640 Component Inspection............................................................................................2641 COOLING FAN MOTOR...........................................................................................2641 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2642 Component Description...........................................................................................2642 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2642 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2642 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2642 WITH GST....................................................................................................2642 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2643 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2643 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2643 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2644 Component Description...........................................................................................2644 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2644 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2644 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2644 WITH GST....................................................................................................2644 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2645 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2645 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2645 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................2646 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2646 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2646 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2646 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2646 WITH GST....................................................................................................2646 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2647 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2648 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................2650 Description.....................................................................................................2650 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2650 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2650 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2650 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2651 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2651 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2651 WITH GST....................................................................................................2651 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2652 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2654 Component Inspection............................................................................................2657 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2657 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2657 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2657 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2657 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2657 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2658 Component Description...........................................................................................2658 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2658 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2658 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2659 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2659 WITH GST....................................................................................................2659 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2660 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2661 Component Inspection............................................................................................2662 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2662 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2662 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2663 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................2664 Component Description...........................................................................................2664 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2664 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2664 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2664 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2665 WITH GST....................................................................................................2665 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2666 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2668 Component Inspection............................................................................................2670 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................2670 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................2671 Component Description...........................................................................................2671 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2671 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2671 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2672 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2672 WITH GST....................................................................................................2672 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2673 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2675 Component Inspection............................................................................................2676 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2676 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................2678 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2678 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2678 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2678 WITH GST....................................................................................................2678 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2678 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................2679 Component Description...........................................................................................2679 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2679 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2679 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2679 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2680 WITH GST....................................................................................................2680 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2681 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2682 Component Inspection............................................................................................2687 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2687 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2687 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2687 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................2689 Component Description...........................................................................................2689 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2689 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2689 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2690 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2690 WITH GST....................................................................................................2690 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2691 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2692 Component Inspection............................................................................................2697 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2697 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2697 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................2698 Component Description...........................................................................................2698 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2698 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2698 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2698 WITH GST....................................................................................................2698 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2699 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................2700 Component Description...........................................................................................2700 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2700 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2700 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2700 WITH GST....................................................................................................2700 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2701 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................2702 Component Description...........................................................................................2702 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2702 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2702 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2702 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2702 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2703 WITH GST....................................................................................................2703 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2704 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2705 DTC P1720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (A/T OUTPUT).........................................................................2707 Description.....................................................................................................2707 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2707 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2707 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2707 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2707 WITH GST....................................................................................................2707 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2708 DTC P1780 SHIFT CHANGE SIGNAL.......................................................................................2709 Description.....................................................................................................2709 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2709 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2709 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2709 WITH GST....................................................................................................2709 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2709 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................2711 Description.....................................................................................................2711 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2711 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2711 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2711 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2711 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2711 WITH GST....................................................................................................2711 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2712 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2713 Component Inspection............................................................................................2715 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2715 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2716 Component Description...........................................................................................2716 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2716 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2716 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2716 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2717 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2717 WITH GST....................................................................................................2717 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2718 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2719 Component Inspection............................................................................................2721 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2721 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2722 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2722 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2723 Component Description...........................................................................................2723 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2723 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2723 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2723 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2724 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2724 WITH GST....................................................................................................2724 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2725 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2726 Component Inspection............................................................................................2729 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2729 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2729 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2729 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2730 Component Description...........................................................................................2730 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2730 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2730 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2730 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2731 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2731 WITH GST....................................................................................................2731 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2732 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2733 Component Inspection............................................................................................2736 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2736 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2736 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2736 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................2737 Component Description...........................................................................................2737 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2737 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2737 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2737 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2738 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2738 WITH GST....................................................................................................2738 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2739 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2740 Component Inspection............................................................................................2744 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2744 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2744 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2744 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)........................................................................2745 Description.....................................................................................................2745 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2745 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2746 Power Valve.............................................................................................2746 VIAS Control Solenoid Valve.............................................................................2746 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2746 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2747 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2748 Component Inspection............................................................................................2751 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2751 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2751 With GST................................................................................................2752 VACUUM TANK.................................................................................................2752 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2752 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2752 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2753 Component Description...........................................................................................2753 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2753 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2754 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2759 Component Inspection............................................................................................2763 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2763 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2763 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2764 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2764 INJECTOR CIRCUIT....................................................................................................2765 Component Description...........................................................................................2765 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2765 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2766 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2767 Component Inspection............................................................................................2770 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2770 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2770 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2770 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT...................................................................................................2771 Description.....................................................................................................2771 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2771 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2771 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2771 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2772 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2773 Component Inspection............................................................................................2776 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2776 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2776 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2777 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2777 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2778 Component Description...........................................................................................2778 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2779 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2780 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2782 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2782 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2783 Description.....................................................................................................2783 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2783 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2783 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2784 Component Description...........................................................................................2784 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2784 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2785 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2786 Component Inspection............................................................................................2791 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2791 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2791 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2791 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2793 Component Description...........................................................................................2793 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2793 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2794 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2795 Component Inspection............................................................................................2799 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2799 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2799 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2800 Component Description...........................................................................................2800 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2800 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2801 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2802 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2803 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2803 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................2805 Description.....................................................................................................2805 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2805 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................2806 Component Inspection............................................................................................2808 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2808 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)..................................................2808 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2808 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2808 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2808 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2808 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................2809 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2809 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2809 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2809 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................2809 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2810 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................2810 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................2812 System Description..............................................................................................2812 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2813 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................2813 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................2814 Component Inspection............................................................................................2815 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................2815 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2815 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2816 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................2817 Description.....................................................................................................2817 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2817 Component Inspection............................................................................................2817 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................2817 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................2818 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................2819 System Description..............................................................................................2819 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2819 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................2819 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................2819 ACCEL OPERATION.............................................................................................2819 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................2819 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................2819 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................2820 Component Description...........................................................................................2820 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2820 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2820 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2820 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2820 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................2820 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2821 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2821 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2821 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2821 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2821 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2821 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2821 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater...................................................................................2821 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2821 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2821 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2821 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2821 Injector........................................................................................................2822 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2822 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 ei..............................................................................................................................2823 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2823 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................2825 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................2825 Precautions for Work................................................................................................2825 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................2826 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................2826 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................2826 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................2827 Work Flow...........................................................................................................2827 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................2827 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................2828 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................2828 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................2828 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................2828 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................2829 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................2829 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................2829 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................2829 DOORS...........................................................................................................2829 TRUNK...........................................................................................................2830 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................2830 SEATS...........................................................................................................2830 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................2830 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................2831 CLIP AND FASTENER.......................................................................................................2833 Clip and Fastener...................................................................................................2833 FRONT BUMPER............................................................................................................2836 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2836 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2838 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2838 FRONT FILLET MOLDING ASSEMBLY...................................................................................2839 Removal.....................................................................................................2839 Installation................................................................................................2839 REAR BUMPER.............................................................................................................2840 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2840 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2842 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2843 REAR BUMPER FASCIA..............................................................................................2843 Removal.....................................................................................................2843 Installation................................................................................................2843 REAR BUMPER CLOSING.............................................................................................2844 Removal.....................................................................................................2844 Installation................................................................................................2844 DRAFTER GUARD...................................................................................................2844 Removal.....................................................................................................2844 Installation................................................................................................2844 REAR FILLET MOLDING ASSEMBLY....................................................................................2844 Removal.....................................................................................................2844 Installation................................................................................................2844 FRONT GRILLE............................................................................................................2845 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2845 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2845 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2845 COWL TOP................................................................................................................2846 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2846 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2846 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2846 FENDER PROTECTOR........................................................................................................2847 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2847 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2847 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2847 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING....................................................................................................2848 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2848 FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING......................................................................................2848 Removal.....................................................................................................2848 Installation................................................................................................2848 REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................2848 Removal.....................................................................................................2848 Installation................................................................................................2848 DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING..............................................................................................2849 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2849 FRONT AND REAR DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING.......................................................................2849 Removal.....................................................................................................2849 Installation................................................................................................2849 DOOR PARTING SEAL.......................................................................................................2850 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2850 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2850 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2850 CENTER MUD GUARD........................................................................................................2851 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2851 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2851 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2851 WINDSHIELD MOLDING......................................................................................................2852 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2852 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2852 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2852 BACK DOOR WINDOW MOLDING................................................................................................2853 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2853 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2853 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2853 ROOF SIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................................2855 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2855 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2855 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2855 ROOF RAIL...............................................................................................................2856 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2856 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2856 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2856 ROOF RAIL BRACKET...............................................................................................2856 Removal.....................................................................................................2856 Installation................................................................................................2856 DOOR FINISHER...........................................................................................................2857 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2857 DOOR FINISHER (FRONT AND REAR)..................................................................................2857 Removal.....................................................................................................2857 Installation................................................................................................2858 BODY SIDE TRIM..........................................................................................................2859 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2859 CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH.....................................................................................2859 Removal.....................................................................................................2859 Installation................................................................................................2860 CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH.....................................................................................2860 Removal.....................................................................................................2860 Installation................................................................................................2860 DASH SIDE FINISHER..............................................................................................2860 Removal.....................................................................................................2860 Installation................................................................................................2860 FRONT PILLAR GARNISH............................................................................................2861 Removal.....................................................................................................2861 Installation................................................................................................2861 KICKING PLATE...................................................................................................2861 Removal.....................................................................................................2861 Installation................................................................................................2861 CENTER MUDGUARD FINISHER (FRONT/REAR)...........................................................................2861 Removal.....................................................................................................2861 Installation................................................................................................2861 FLOOR TRIM..............................................................................................................2862 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2862 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2862 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2863 HEADLINING..............................................................................................................2864 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2864 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2865 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2865 LUGGAGE FLOOR TRIM......................................................................................................2866 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2866 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2867 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2867 BACK DOOR TRIM..........................................................................................................2868 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2868 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2868 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2868 BACK DOOR OUTSIDE FINISHER......................................................................................2868 Removal and Installation....................................................................................2868 em..............................................................................................................................2869 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2869 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................2873 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2873 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2873 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2873 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant............................................................................2873 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2873 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2873 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2873 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2873 Parts Requiring Angle Tightening................................................................................2874 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2874 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2874 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2874 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2876 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2876 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2878 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2881 NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise...............................................................................2881 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2882 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2883 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2883 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2883 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.................................................................2884 AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT.............................................................................2884 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2884 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2884 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2884 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2885 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2885 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2885 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2885 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2886 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2886 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2886 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2886 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR...........................................................................................2887 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2887 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2887 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2889 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2889 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2889 Part Installation Direction.............................................................................2889 Intake Manifold Collector (Lower).......................................................................2890 Intake Manifold Collector (Upper).......................................................................2890 Water Hose..............................................................................................2890 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2890 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2891 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2891 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2891 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2891 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2891 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2892 Intake Manifold.........................................................................................2892 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2893 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2893 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2893 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2894 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2894 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2894 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2895 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2895 Heated Oxygen Sensor....................................................................................2895 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2896 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2896 2WD MODEL...................................................................................................2896 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2896 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2898 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2898 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2900 AWD MODEL...................................................................................................2901 Models Produced Before May 2003.........................................................................2901 Models Produced After June 2003.........................................................................2902 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2902 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2904 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2904 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2906 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2908 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2908 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2908 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2908 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2909 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2909 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2909 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2909 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2910 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2911 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2911 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2912 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2913 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2915 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2915 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2917 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2917 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2917 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2918 FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE.............................................................................................2920 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2920 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2920 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2924 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2928 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2929 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2929 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2930 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2937 Timing Chain............................................................................................2937 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2937 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2946 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................2948 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2948 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2948 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2950 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................2950 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................2950 Camshaft Journal Clearance..............................................................................2950 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................2951 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................2952 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2952 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................2952 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2953 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................2955 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2955 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................2958 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................2960 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................2960 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2960 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2960 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................2961 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2961 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2962 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................2962 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2962 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2962 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................2964 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................2964 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................2964 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2965 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2965 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2966 Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts...................................................................2966 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................2966 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2967 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2968 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2969 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2969 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION....................................................................................2969 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................2970 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................2971 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................2971 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................2971 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................2971 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................2971 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................2972 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................2973 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................2974 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................2974 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2974 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................2976 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2976 2WD MODEL...................................................................................................2976 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2977 Outline.................................................................................................2977 Preparation.............................................................................................2977 Engine Room.............................................................................................2977 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2977 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2978 Removal Work............................................................................................2978 Separation Work.........................................................................................2979 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2979 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2980 AWD MODEL...................................................................................................2981 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2981 Outline.................................................................................................2981 Preparation.............................................................................................2982 Engine Room.............................................................................................2982 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2982 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2983 Removal Work............................................................................................2983 Separation Work.........................................................................................2983 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2984 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2984 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................2986 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2986 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2987 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2992 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................2997 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2997 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................2997 When New Cylinder Block is Used.........................................................................2997 When Cylinder Block is Reused...........................................................................2998 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................2998 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................2998 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2998 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused...........................................................2998 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................2999 Undersize Bearings Usage Guide..........................................................................2999 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................2999 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2999 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused...........................................................3000 Main Bearing Selection Table............................................................................3000 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................3001 Undersize Bearing Usage Guide...........................................................................3001 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3002 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................3002 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................3002 PISTON AND PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE.........................................................................3002 Inner Diameter of Piston Pin............................................................................3002 Outer Diameter of Piston Pin............................................................................3002 Piston and Piston Pin Oil Clearance.....................................................................3003 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................3003 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................3003 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................3003 CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING DIAMETER (BIG END)...........................................................3004 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)............................................................3004 Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End)............................................................3004 Outer Diameter of Piston Pin............................................................................3004 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)........................................................3004 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................3005 INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING......................................................................3005 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................3006 Inner Diameter of Cylinder Bore.........................................................................3006 Outer Diameter of Piston................................................................................3006 Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................3006 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................3007 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL........................................................................3007 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN............................................................................3007 OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT........................................................................3007 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................3008 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3008 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3008 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3008 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................3009 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3009 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3009 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING................................................................................3009 CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................3009 OUTER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT.....................................................................3010 OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLT.......................................................................3010 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................3010 OIL JET.....................................................................................................3010 OIL JET RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................3010 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3011 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3011 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................3011 DRIVE BELT..................................................................................................3012 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD.............................................3012 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................3012 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................3013 VALVE.......................................................................................................3013 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................3013 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................3013 Valve Spring............................................................................................3014 Valve Lifter............................................................................................3014 Available Valve Lifter..................................................................................3015 Valve Guide.............................................................................................3016 Valve Seat..............................................................................................3017 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................3018 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................3019 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................3020 Available Piston........................................................................................3020 Piston Ring.............................................................................................3020 Piston Pin..............................................................................................3020 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................3021 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................3022 AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING......................................................................................3023 Undersize...............................................................................................3023 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................3024 Undersize...............................................................................................3024 BEARING OIL CLEARANCE.......................................................................................3024 VK45DE..................................................................................................................3025 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3025 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant............................................................................3025 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................3025 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................3025 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................3025 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................3025 Parts Requiring Angular Tightening..............................................................................3025 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3026 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................3026 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3026 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3027 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3027 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3029 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3032 NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise...............................................................................3032 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................3033 ENGINE ROOM COVER...................................................................................................3034 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3034 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3034 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3034 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................3035 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................3035 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................3035 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3035 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3035 Alternator, Water Pump and A/C Compressor Belt..........................................................3035 Power Steering Oil Pump Belt............................................................................3036 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3036 Power Steering Oil Pump Belt............................................................................3036 Alternator, Water Pump and A/C Compressor Belt..........................................................3036 Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley......................................................................3037 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3037 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3037 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................3038 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3038 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3038 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3038 CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER.................................................................................3039 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................3040 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3040 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3041 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3042 Surface Distortion......................................................................................3042 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3042 Tightening Intake Manifold Lower Bolts..................................................................3042 Tightening Intake Manifold Upper Bolts..................................................................3043 Installation of Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................3043 Connecting Water Hose...................................................................................3043 Connecting Vacuum Tube..................................................................................3043 Connecting Quick Connector of Fuel Tube.................................................................3043 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3044 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................3045 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3045 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3045 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3046 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3047 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................3048 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3048 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3048 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3049 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3049 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3050 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................3051 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3051 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3051 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3051 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................3052 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3052 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3052 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3052 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3053 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................3054 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3054 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3054 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3055 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3056 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................3057 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3057 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3057 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3058 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................3060 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3060 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3061 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3063 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3064 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................3070 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3070 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3070 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3071 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3073 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................3073 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................3074 Camshaft Journal Clearance..............................................................................3074 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................3074 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................3075 Valve Lifter and Adjusting Shim.........................................................................3075 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................3075 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................3076 INSPECTION..................................................................................................3076 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................3077 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................3081 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................3081 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3081 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3081 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................3082 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3082 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3082 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................3083 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3083 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3083 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................3085 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................3085 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................3085 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3086 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3086 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3087 Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts...................................................................3087 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3087 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3088 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3088 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3089 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3090 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION....................................................................................3090 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................3090 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................3090 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................3091 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................3092 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................3093 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................3094 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................3094 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3095 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3095 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3095 Preparation.............................................................................................3095 Engine Room LH..........................................................................................3096 Engine Room RH..........................................................................................3096 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................3096 Removal Work............................................................................................3096 Separation Work.........................................................................................3097 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3097 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3097 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................3099 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3099 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3100 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3103 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................3108 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................3108 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................3108 Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used:...............................................3108 When Cylinder Block is Reused:..........................................................................3108 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................3109 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................3109 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3109 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused:..........................................................3109 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................3109 Under Size Bearings Usage Guide.........................................................................3109 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................3110 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3110 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused:..........................................................3110 Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 Journal).................................................3111 Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 Journal)..................................................3112 Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals)................................................................3112 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide.......................................................................3113 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3113 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................3113 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................3114 PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE.............................................................................3114 Inner Diameter of Piston Pin............................................................................3114 Outer Diameter of Piston Pin............................................................................3114 Piston and Piston Pin Clearance.........................................................................3114 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................3115 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................3115 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................3116 CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END)............................................................................3116 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)............................................................3116 Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End)............................................................3116 Outer Diameter of Piston Pin............................................................................3117 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)........................................................3117 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................3117 INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING......................................................................3118 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................3118 Inner Diameter of Cylinder Bore.........................................................................3118 Outer Diameter of Piston................................................................................3119 Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................3119 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................3119 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL........................................................................3120 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN............................................................................3120 OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT........................................................................3120 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................3120 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3121 Method of Measurement...................................................................................3121 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3121 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................3121 Method of Measurement...................................................................................3121 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3122 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING................................................................................3122 CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................3122 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3123 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3123 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................3123 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD........................................................................3123 DRIVE BELTS.................................................................................................3123 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................3124 VALVE.......................................................................................................3124 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................3124 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................3124 Available Shims.........................................................................................3125 Valve Spring............................................................................................3126 Valve Lifter............................................................................................3126 Valve Guide.............................................................................................3127 Valve Seat..............................................................................................3127 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................3128 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................3129 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................3130 Available Piston........................................................................................3130 Piston Ring.............................................................................................3130 Piston Pin..............................................................................................3130 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................3131 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................3131 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................3132 Undersize...............................................................................................3133 Bearing Clearance.......................................................................................3133 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................3133 Undersize...............................................................................................3133 Bearing Clearance.......................................................................................3133 ex..............................................................................................................................3135 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3135 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3136 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3136 EXHAUST SYSTEM..........................................................................................................3137 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3137 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3137 VQ35DE..........................................................................................................3137 VK45DE..........................................................................................................3138 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3138 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3138 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3139 fax.............................................................................................................................3141 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3141 2WD.....................................................................................................................3142 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3142 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3142 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3142 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3143 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3143 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3144 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...............................................................................3144 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3144 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3144 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3144 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3145 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3145 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3145 SERVICE DATA........................................................................................................3146 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3146 AWD.....................................................................................................................3147 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3147 Caution.........................................................................................................3147 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3148 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3148 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3148 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3149 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3149 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3150 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...............................................................................3150 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3150 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3150 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3150 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3151 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3151 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3151 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT...................................................................................................3152 Removal and Installation (Left Side)............................................................................3152 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3152 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3152 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3152 Removal and installation (Right Side)...........................................................................3153 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3153 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3153 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3154 Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)............................................................................3154 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3154 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3154 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3155 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3155 Shaft...................................................................................................3155 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3155 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3155 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3156 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3156 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3158 Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)...........................................................................3159 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3159 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3159 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3160 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3160 Shaft...................................................................................................3160 Joint Sub-assembly......................................................................................3160 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3161 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3161 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3161 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3162 SERVICE DATA........................................................................................................3165 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3165 Drive Shaft.....................................................................................................3165 Tightening Torque...............................................................................................3165 ffd.............................................................................................................................3167 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3167 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3168 Precautions.........................................................................................................3168 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3169 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3169 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3171 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3172 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3172 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................3173 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3173 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3173 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3174 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................3175 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3175 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3175 Right Side:.................................................................................................3175 Left Side:..................................................................................................3175 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3175 Right Side:.................................................................................................3175 Left Side:..................................................................................................3175 FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3176 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE)...................................................................................3176 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3176 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3176 Removal and Installation (VK45DE)...................................................................................3177 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3177 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3177 Front Final Drive Breather Hose.....................................................................................3178 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (VQ35DE)...............................................................................3178 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (VK45DE)...............................................................................3179 Components..........................................................................................................3180 COMPONENTS (VQ35DE).............................................................................................3180 COMPONENTS (VK45DE).............................................................................................3182 Side Shaft..........................................................................................................3184 BEARING AND OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT................................................................................3184 EXTENSION TUBE REPLACEMENT......................................................................................3185 PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION......................................................................................3185 Total Preload...............................................................................................3185 Drive Gear To Drive Pinion Gear Backlash....................................................................3186 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................3186 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................3186 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................3187 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY........................................................................................3187 Removal of Drive Gear and Differential Case Assembly........................................................3187 Removal of Drive Pinion Assembly............................................................................3188 Differential Case Disassembly...............................................................................3188 Inspection..................................................................................................3190 Differential Case Assembly..........................................................................................3190 Installation Drive Pinion Assembly..................................................................................3193 DIFFERENTIAL CASE INSTALLATION..................................................................................3194 TOOTH CONTACT INSPECTION........................................................................................3196 Tooth Contact Pattern and Height Adjusting Washer Selection.................................................3197 TOOTH CONTACT ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................3197 TOTAL PRELOAD INSPECTION........................................................................................3199 DRIVE PINION PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................3199 Removal of Differential Case Assembly.......................................................................3199 Removal of Drive Pinon Assembly.............................................................................3199 Preload Adjustment..........................................................................................3199 Reassembly of Drive Pinion Assembly.........................................................................3200 Installation of Differential Case Assembly..................................................................3201 After Inspection....................................................................................................3201 Carrier Cover Installation..........................................................................................3203 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3204 General Specifications..............................................................................................3204 Drive Gear Runout...................................................................................................3204 Side Gear Adjustment................................................................................................3204 AVAILABLE SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS..............................................................................3204 SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS............................................................................3204 Side Retainer Side:.........................................................................................3204 Differential Case to Side Bearing:..........................................................................3204 Drive Pinion Height Adjustment......................................................................................3205 AVAILABLE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHERS.......................................................................3205 Drive Pinion Preload Adjustment.....................................................................................3205 AVAILABLE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHERS.......................................................................3205 Total Preload Adjustment............................................................................................3205 fl..............................................................................................................................3207 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3207 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3208 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3208 FUEL SYSTEM.............................................................................................................3209 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3209 General Precautions.................................................................................................3209 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY..............................................................3211 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3211 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3211 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3213 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3214 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3215 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3215 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3216 FUEL TANK...............................................................................................................3217 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3217 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3217 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3218 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3218 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3219 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3219 fsu.............................................................................................................................3221 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3221 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3222 Caution.............................................................................................................3222 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3223 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3223 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3224 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3225 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3225 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3226 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3226 INSPECTION OF TRANSVERSE LINK BALL JOINT END PLAY...............................................................3226 STRUT INSPECTION................................................................................................3226 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................3226 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3226 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................3226 INSPECTION OF CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES.....................................................3226 Using a CCK Gauge...........................................................................................3226 Toe-In Inspection...........................................................................................3227 Components..........................................................................................................3228 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3229 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3229 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3230 COIL SPRING AND STRUT...................................................................................................3231 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3231 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3231 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3231 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3232 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3232 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3232 Strut Inspection............................................................................................3232 Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Inspection..............................................................3232 Coil Spring Inspection......................................................................................3232 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3233 TRANSVERSE LINK.........................................................................................................3234 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3234 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3234 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3234 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................3234 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3234 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................3235 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................3235 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................3235 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3235 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................3236 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3236 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3236 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3236 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3236 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER.................................................................................................3237 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3237 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3237 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3237 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3237 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................3238 Wheel Alignment (Unladen)...........................................................................................3238 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................3238 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................3238 gi..............................................................................................................................3239 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3239 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3241 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3241 Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If Equipped).........................3241 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3242 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3242 General Precautions.................................................................................................3242 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst..................................................................................3244 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended)........................................................3244 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Required)...........................................................3245 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System............................................3245 Precautions for Hoses...............................................................................................3245 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION...................................................................................3245 HOSE CLAMPING...................................................................................................3246 Precautions for Engine Oils.........................................................................................3246 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................3246 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS............................................................................3246 Precautions for Air Conditioning....................................................................................3246 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL..................................................................................................3247 Description.........................................................................................................3247 Terms...............................................................................................................3247 Units...............................................................................................................3247 Contents............................................................................................................3247 Components..........................................................................................................3248 SYMBOLS.........................................................................................................3248 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................................................3249 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3249 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..................................................................3249 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION..............................................................3250 TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration...................................3250 TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text...........................................3251 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES............................................................3251 How to Read Wiring Diagrams.........................................................................................3253 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS...............................................................................................3253 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -................................................................................3254 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3255 Harness Indication..........................................................................................3257 Component Indication........................................................................................3257 Switch Positions............................................................................................3257 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines...................................................................3258 Multiple Switch.............................................................................................3259 Reference Area..............................................................................................3260 Abbreviations.......................................................................................................3261 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT.............................................................................3262 How to Check Terminal...............................................................................................3262 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT..................................................................................3262 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS.........................................................................................3262 Probing from Harness Side...................................................................................3262 Probing from Terminal Side..................................................................................3262 How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal............................................................3263 Waterproof Connector Inspection.............................................................................3264 Terminal Lock Inspection....................................................................................3264 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident.......................................................3265 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................3265 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS.......................................................................................3265 Introduction................................................................................................3265 Vehicle Vibration...........................................................................................3266 Heat Sensitive..............................................................................................3267 Freezing....................................................................................................3267 Water Intrusion.............................................................................................3267 Electrical Load.............................................................................................3267 Cold or Hot Start Up........................................................................................3268 CIRCUIT INSPECTION..............................................................................................3268 Introduction................................................................................................3268 Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit..........................................................................3268 Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit.........................................................................3269 Ground Inspection...........................................................................................3270 Voltage Drop Tests..........................................................................................3270 Control Unit Circuit Test...................................................................................3272 Control Units and Electrical Parts..................................................................................3273 PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................................................3273 CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM..............................................................................................3275 Description.........................................................................................................3275 Function and System Application.....................................................................................3275 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement............................................................................3276 Checking Equipment..................................................................................................3276 CONSULT-II Start Procedure..........................................................................................3277 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit........................................................................3278 INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................................3279 LIFTING POINT...........................................................................................................3280 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3280 Garage Jack and Safety Stand........................................................................................3280 2-Pole Lift.........................................................................................................3281 Board-On Lift.......................................................................................................3282 TOW TRUCK TOWING........................................................................................................3283 Tow Truck Towing....................................................................................................3283 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................3283 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................3284 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle)..........................................................................3284 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS.....................................................................................3285 Tightening Torque Table.............................................................................................3285 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS..............................................................................3286 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants..........................................................................3286 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION..............................................................................................3287 Model Variation.....................................................................................................3287 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER...........................................................................................3288 IDENTIFICATION PLATE............................................................................................3289 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER............................................................................................3289 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER...................................................................................3289 Dimensions..........................................................................................................3290 Wheels & Tires......................................................................................................3290 TERMINOLOGY.............................................................................................................3291 SAE J1930 Terminology List..........................................................................................3291 gw..............................................................................................................................3295 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3295 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3297 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3297 Handling for Adhesive and Primer....................................................................................3297 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3297 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3298 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3298 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3298 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3299 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3299 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3299 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3300 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3300 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3300 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3300 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3301 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3301 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3301 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3301 DOORS...........................................................................................................3301 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3302 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3302 SEATS...........................................................................................................3302 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3302 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3303 WINDSHIELD GLASS........................................................................................................3305 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3305 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3305 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3306 Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield........................................................................3306 REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING...........................................................................................3307 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3307 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3307 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3308 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM.....................................................................................................3309 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3309 System Description..................................................................................................3310 WITH FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM.......................................................................3310 WITH FRONT AND REAR WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM....................................................................3310 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................3311 Front Driver Side Door......................................................................................3311 Front Passenger Side Door...................................................................................3311 Rear Door (LH or RH) / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System............................................3312 Rear Door (LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................3313 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................3313 POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK........................................................................................3314 With front Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................................................3314 With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................................................3314 POWER WINDOW LOCK...............................................................................................3314 With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................................................3314 With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................................................3314 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................3315 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM...............................................................................................3315 POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE KEY CYLINDER SWITCH.................................................................3315 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3316 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3316 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3317 System Diagram..............................................................................................3317 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3317 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3320 System Diagram..............................................................................................3320 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3320 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3323 System Diagram..............................................................................................3323 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3324 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3326 System Diagram..............................................................................................3326 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3327 Schematic (With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System)...............................................................3330 Wiring Diagram – WINDOW – (With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System)...............................................3331 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System....................................3335 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch Sy...................3336 Terminal and Reference Value for Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) / With Front Power Wi...................3337 Schematic (With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System)......................................................3338 Wiring Diagram – WINDOW – (With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System)......................................3339 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch..................................3344 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti...................3345 Terminal and Reference Value for (Front and Rear) Power Window Switch / With Front and Rear Windo...................3346 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3346 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................3347 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3348 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3348 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................3348 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System.........................................3349 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti- pinch System...............................3350 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check...........................................................................3351 Power Window Main Switch Power Supply Circuit Check.................................................................3352 Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check....................................3353 Rear Power Window Switch (LH or RH) Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check / With Front and Rear P...................3354 Front Power Window Regulator (Driver Side) Circuit Check............................................................3355 Front Power Window Regulator (Passenger Side) Circuit Check.........................................................3356 Rear Power Window Regulator (LH) Circuit Check / With Front Anti-pinch Power Window System..........................3357 Rear Power Window Regulator (RH) Circuit Check / With Front Anti-pinch Power Window System..........................3359 Rear Power Window Regulator (LH or RH) Circuit Check / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinc...................3362 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Driver Side)............................................................................3363 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Passenger Side).........................................................................3365 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Anti-pinch System..................................3367 Encoder Circuit Check (Driver Side).................................................................................3369 Encoder Circuit Check (Passenger Side)..............................................................................3371 Encoder Circuit Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................3373 Door Switch Check...................................................................................................3375 Front Door Key Cylinder Switch Check................................................................................3377 Power Window Serial Link Check (Passenger Side).....................................................................3379 Power Window Serial Link Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System.................3381 Power Window Lock Switch Check......................................................................................3381 SIDE WINDOW GLASS.......................................................................................................3382 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3382 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3382 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3383 Repairing Water Leaks.......................................................................................3383 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR..........................................................................................3384 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3384 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3384 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3385 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3385 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3385 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3385 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION......................................................................................3386 Setting of Limit Switch.....................................................................................3386 Resetting...................................................................................................3386 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3386 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR...........................................................................................3387 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3387 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3387 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3388 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3388 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION......................................................................................3389 Setting of Limit Switch (With Anti-pinch System Only).......................................................3389 Resetting...................................................................................................3389 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3389 INSIDE MIRROR...........................................................................................................3390 Wiring Diagram–I/MIRR–.............................................................................................3390 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3391 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3391 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3391 COMPASS.........................................................................................................3391 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER....................................................................................................3392 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3392 System Description..................................................................................................3392 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3394 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3394 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3395 System diagram..............................................................................................3395 Input/output signal chart...................................................................................3395 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3398 System diagram..............................................................................................3398 Input/output signal chart...................................................................................3398 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3401 System diagram..............................................................................................3401 Input/output signal chart...................................................................................3402 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3404 System diagram..............................................................................................3404 Input/output signal chart...................................................................................3405 Schematic – DEF –...................................................................................................3408 Wiring Diagram –DEF–................................................................................................3409 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM................................................................................3413 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R...........................................................................3413 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3413 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................3414 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3415 Display Item List...........................................................................................3415 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3415 Display Item List...........................................................................................3415 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart.....................................................................................3416 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check...........................................................................3416 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check...........................................................................3417 Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check.....................................................................3419 Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check..................................................................................3421 Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check.....................................................................3422 Driver Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check......................................................................3423 Passenger Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check...................................................................3424 Rear Window Defogger Signal Check...................................................................................3425 Filament Check......................................................................................................3426 Filament Repair.....................................................................................................3426 REPAIR EQUIPMENT................................................................................................3426 REPAIRING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3427 DOOR MIRROR.............................................................................................................3428 Door Mirror (Only Manual Operation).................................................................................3428 WIRING DIAGRAM –MIRROR– FOR MANUAL OPERATION DOOR MIRROR........................................................3428 Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Door Mirror.................................................................3429 WIRING DIAGRAM – MIRROR– FOR AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER INTERLOCKING DOOR MIRROR................................3430 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3432 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3432 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3432 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3432 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3432 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3433 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 idx.............................................................................................................................3435 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3436 A.......................................................................................................................3436 B.......................................................................................................................3436 C.......................................................................................................................3436 D.......................................................................................................................3437 E.......................................................................................................................3437 F.......................................................................................................................3438 G.......................................................................................................................3438 H.......................................................................................................................3438 I.......................................................................................................................3439 J.......................................................................................................................3439 K.......................................................................................................................3439 L.......................................................................................................................3439 M.......................................................................................................................3439 N.......................................................................................................................3440 O.......................................................................................................................3440 P.......................................................................................................................3440 R.......................................................................................................................3440 S.......................................................................................................................3441 T.......................................................................................................................3441 U.......................................................................................................................3441 V.......................................................................................................................3441 W.......................................................................................................................3442 ip..............................................................................................................................3443 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3443 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3444 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3444 Precautions.........................................................................................................3444 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3445 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3445 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3445 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3446 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3446 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3446 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3447 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3447 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3447 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3447 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3448 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3448 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3448 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3448 DOORS...........................................................................................................3448 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3449 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3449 SEATS...........................................................................................................3449 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3449 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3450 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3452 Component Parts Drawing.............................................................................................3452 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3453 WORK STEP.......................................................................................................3453 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3454 (A) Front Kicking Plate (LH/RH).............................................................................3454 (B) Dash Side Finisher (LH/RH)..............................................................................3454 (C) Front Pillar Garnish (LH/RH)............................................................................3454 (D) A/T Select Lever Knob...................................................................................3454 (E) Instrument Clock Finisher...............................................................................3454 (F) A/T Console Finisher....................................................................................3454 (G) Console Finisher (LH/RH)................................................................................3454 (H) Center Console..........................................................................................3454 (I) Instrument Lower Cover..................................................................................3455 (J) Instrument Passenger Lower Panel........................................................................3455 (K) Instrument Driver Lower Panel...........................................................................3455 (L) Steering Column Front Lower Cover.......................................................................3455 (M) Steering Column Lower Cover.............................................................................3455 (N) Steering Column Upper Cover.............................................................................3456 (O) Wiper and Washer Switch.................................................................................3456 (P) Lighting and Turn Signal Switch.........................................................................3456 (Q) Steering Lock Escutcheon................................................................................3456 (R) Combination Meter Assembly..............................................................................3456 (S) Instrument Side Panel (LH/RH)...........................................................................3456 (T) Cluster Lid C...........................................................................................3457 (U) Display Unit and Audio Unit.............................................................................3457 (V) Front Defroster Grille (LH/RH)..........................................................................3457 (W) Combination Meter Bracket...............................................................................3457 (X) Side Ventilation (LH/RH)................................................................................3458 (Y) Instrument Panel and Pad................................................................................3458 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3458 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3458 A/T CONSOLE FINISHER............................................................................................3458 Disassembly.................................................................................................3459 Assembly....................................................................................................3459 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3459 Disassembly.................................................................................................3459 Assembly....................................................................................................3460 INSTRUMENT PASSENGER LOWER PANEL................................................................................3460 Disassembly.................................................................................................3460 Assembly....................................................................................................3460 lan.............................................................................................................................3461 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3461 CAN.....................................................................................................................3464 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3464 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................3464 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II...............................................................................3464 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II...........................................................................3464 Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3464 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3464 Precautions For Harness Repair..................................................................................3465 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3465 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................3466 System Description..............................................................................................3466 CAN Communication Unit..........................................................................................3466 TYPE 1/TYPE2................................................................................................3466 System Diagram..........................................................................................3466 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................3467 TYPE 3......................................................................................................3469 System Diagram..........................................................................................3469 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................3469 TYPE 4/TYPE5................................................................................................3473 System Diagram..........................................................................................3473 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................3473 TYPE 6......................................................................................................3476 System Diagram..........................................................................................3476 Input/output Signal Chart...............................................................................3477 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1).................................................................................................3480 System Description..............................................................................................3480 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3480 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3481 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3483 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3485 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3487 Case 1..................................................................................................3487 Case 2..................................................................................................3488 Case 3..................................................................................................3489 Case 4..................................................................................................3490 Case 5..................................................................................................3491 Case 6..................................................................................................3492 Case 7..................................................................................................3493 Case 8..................................................................................................3494 Case 9..................................................................................................3495 Case 10.................................................................................................3496 Case 11.................................................................................................3497 Case 12.................................................................................................3498 Case 13.................................................................................................3499 Case 14.................................................................................................3499 Case 15.................................................................................................3500 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3500 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3500 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3501 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3501 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3502 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3502 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3503 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3503 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3504 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3504 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3505 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3505 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3506 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3510 Component Inspection............................................................................................3510 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3510 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2).................................................................................................3511 System Description..............................................................................................3511 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3511 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3512 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3514 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3516 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3518 Case 1..................................................................................................3518 Case 2..................................................................................................3519 Case 3..................................................................................................3520 Case 4..................................................................................................3521 Case 5..................................................................................................3522 Case 6..................................................................................................3523 Case 7..................................................................................................3524 Case 8..................................................................................................3525 Case 9..................................................................................................3526 Case 10.................................................................................................3527 Case 11.................................................................................................3528 Case 12.................................................................................................3529 Case 13.................................................................................................3530 Case 14.................................................................................................3531 Case 15.................................................................................................3532 Case 16.................................................................................................3532 Case 17.................................................................................................3533 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3533 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3533 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3534 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3535 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3535 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3536 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3536 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3537 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3537 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3538 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3538 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3539 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3539 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3540 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3541 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3545 Component Inspection............................................................................................3545 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3545 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3).................................................................................................3546 System Description..............................................................................................3546 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3546 Schematic.......................................................................................................3547 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3548 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3551 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3553 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3556 Case 1..................................................................................................3556 Case 2..................................................................................................3557 Case 3..................................................................................................3558 Case 4..................................................................................................3559 Case 5..................................................................................................3560 Case 6..................................................................................................3561 Case 7..................................................................................................3562 Case 8..................................................................................................3563 Case 9..................................................................................................3564 Case 10.................................................................................................3565 Case 11.................................................................................................3566 Case 12.................................................................................................3567 Case 13.................................................................................................3568 Case 14.................................................................................................3569 Case 15.................................................................................................3570 Case 16.................................................................................................3571 Case 17.................................................................................................3572 Case 18.................................................................................................3573 Case 19.................................................................................................3574 Case 20.................................................................................................3574 Case 21.................................................................................................3575 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3575 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3576 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3576 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3577 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3578 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3578 Display Control Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3579 Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit Circuit Check............................................................3579 ICC Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................................3580 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3580 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3581 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3581 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3582 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3582 ICC Sensor Circuit Check........................................................................................3583 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3583 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3584 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3585 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3586 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3591 Component Inspection............................................................................................3591 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3591 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4).................................................................................................3592 System Description..............................................................................................3592 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3592 Schematic.......................................................................................................3593 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3594 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3597 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3599 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3601 Case 1..................................................................................................3601 Case 2..................................................................................................3602 Case 3..................................................................................................3603 Case 4..................................................................................................3604 Case 5..................................................................................................3605 Case 6..................................................................................................3606 Case 7..................................................................................................3607 Case 8..................................................................................................3608 Case 9..................................................................................................3609 Case 10.................................................................................................3610 Case 11.................................................................................................3611 Case 12.................................................................................................3612 Case 13.................................................................................................3613 Case 14.................................................................................................3614 Case 15.................................................................................................3614 Case 16.................................................................................................3615 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3615 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3615 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3616 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3616 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3617 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3617 AWD Control Unit Circuit Check..................................................................................3618 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3618 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3619 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3619 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3620 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3620 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3621 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3622 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3625 Component Inspection............................................................................................3625 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3625 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5).................................................................................................3626 System Description..............................................................................................3626 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3626 Schematic.......................................................................................................3627 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3628 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3631 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3633 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3635 Case 1..................................................................................................3635 Case 2..................................................................................................3636 Case 3..................................................................................................3637 Case 4..................................................................................................3638 Case 5..................................................................................................3639 Case 6..................................................................................................3640 Case 7..................................................................................................3641 Case 8..................................................................................................3642 Case 9..................................................................................................3643 Case 10.................................................................................................3644 Case 11.................................................................................................3645 Case 12.................................................................................................3646 Case 13.................................................................................................3647 Case 14.................................................................................................3648 Case 15.................................................................................................3649 Case 16.................................................................................................3650 Case 17.................................................................................................3650 Case 18.................................................................................................3651 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3651 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3651 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3652 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3653 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3653 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3654 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3654 AWD Control Unit Circuit Check..................................................................................3655 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3655 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3656 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3656 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3657 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3657 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3658 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3659 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3659 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3664 Component Inspection............................................................................................3664 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3664 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6).................................................................................................3665 System Description..............................................................................................3665 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3665 Schematic.......................................................................................................3666 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3667 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3670 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3672 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3675 Case 1..................................................................................................3675 Case 2..................................................................................................3676 Case 3..................................................................................................3677 Case 4..................................................................................................3678 Case 5..................................................................................................3679 Case 6..................................................................................................3680 Case 7..................................................................................................3681 Case 8..................................................................................................3682 Case 9..................................................................................................3683 Case 10.................................................................................................3684 Case 11.................................................................................................3685 Case 12.................................................................................................3686 Case 13.................................................................................................3687 Case 14.................................................................................................3688 Case 15.................................................................................................3689 Case 16.................................................................................................3690 Case 17.................................................................................................3691 Case 18.................................................................................................3692 Case 19.................................................................................................3693 Case 20.................................................................................................3694 Case 21.................................................................................................3695 Case 22.................................................................................................3696 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3696 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3697 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3697 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3698 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3699 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3699 Display Control Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3700 Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit Circuit Check............................................................3700 AWD Control Unit Circuit Check..................................................................................3701 ICC Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................................3701 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3702 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3702 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3703 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3703 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3704 ICC Sensor Circuit Check........................................................................................3704 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3705 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3705 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3706 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3707 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3712 Component Inspection............................................................................................3712 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3712 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)............................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 98 lt..............................................................................................................................3713 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3713 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3717 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3717 General Precautions for Service Operations..........................................................................3718 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3718 HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -.................................................................................................3719 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3719 System Description..................................................................................................3719 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3719 Low Beam Operation..........................................................................................3720 High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation.................................................................3720 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3721 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3721 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (If equipped)..............................................................................3721 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.........................................................................................3721 XENON HEADLAMP..................................................................................................3721 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3721 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3722 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3723 System Diagram..............................................................................................3723 Input/Output Signal Chart...................................................................................3723 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3726 System Diagram..............................................................................................3726 Input/Output Signal Chart...................................................................................3726 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3729 System Diagram..............................................................................................3729 Input/Output Signal Chart...................................................................................3730 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3732 System Diagram..............................................................................................3732 Input/Output Signal Chart...................................................................................3733 Schematic...........................................................................................................3736 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —...........................................................................................3737 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3741 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3742 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3742 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3743 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3743 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3744 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3744 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3745 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3745 Display Item List...........................................................................................3745 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3745 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3745 Display Item List...........................................................................................3746 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3746 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3746 Display Item List...........................................................................................3746 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3747 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................3747 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3748 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3748 All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu.....................................................................3748 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3749 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3749 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (Both Sides)..................................................................3749 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (One Side)....................................................................3751 High Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate........................................................................3752 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)..................................................................3752 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (One Side)....................................................................3755 Headlamp RH Low Beam and High Beam Do Not Illuminate................................................................3756 Headlamp LH Low Beam and High Beam Do Not Illuminate................................................................3756 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF...........................................................................................3757 CAUTION:............................................................................................................3758 Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................3758 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3759 PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING....................................................................................3759 LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM..........................................................................................3759 ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)...................................................3760 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3760 HEADLAMP HIGH/LOW BEAM..........................................................................................3760 PARKING LAMP (CLEARANCE LAMP)...................................................................................3761 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP..........................................................................................3761 FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP..........................................................................................3761 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3761 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3761 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3762 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3762 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3762 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3762 DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM....................................................................................................3763 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3763 System Description..................................................................................................3763 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3763 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION.........................................................................................3764 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3764 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION............................................................................................3764 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3764 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3765 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3766 System Diagram..............................................................................................3766 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3766 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3769 System Diagram..............................................................................................3769 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3769 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3772 System Diagram..............................................................................................3772 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3773 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3775 System Diagram..............................................................................................3775 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3776 Schematic...........................................................................................................3779 Wiring Diagram — DTRL —.............................................................................................3780 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................3784 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3785 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3785 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT..................................................................3785 INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT.........................................................................3786 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................3787 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3787 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3788 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3788 Display Item List...........................................................................................3788 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3789 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3789 Display Item List...........................................................................................3789 Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly.....................................................................3790 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3792 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3792 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3792 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3792 AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM.......................................................................................................3793 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3793 System Description..................................................................................................3793 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3793 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3794 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3794 DELAY TIMER FUNCTION............................................................................................3794 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3794 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3795 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3796 System Diagram..............................................................................................3796 Input/output Signal chart...................................................................................3796 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3799 System Diagram..............................................................................................3799 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3799 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3802 System Diagram..............................................................................................3802 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3803 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3805 System Diagram..............................................................................................3805 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3806 Major Components and Functions......................................................................................3809 Schematic...........................................................................................................3810 Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —...........................................................................................3811 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................3814 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3815 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3816 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3816 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS........................................................................................3816 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3816 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3817 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3818 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3818 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3818 Work Support Setting Item...................................................................................3819 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3819 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3819 Display Item List...........................................................................................3819 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3820 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3820 Display Item List...........................................................................................3820 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3820 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................3820 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3821 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3821 All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu.....................................................................3822 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3822 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3822 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................3822 Lighting Switch Inspection..........................................................................................3823 Optical sensor System Inspection....................................................................................3823 Removal and Installation for Auto Light Sensor......................................................................3825 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3825 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3825 HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL.................................................................................................3826 Schematic...........................................................................................................3826 Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —............................................................................................3827 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3830 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3830 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3830 Switch Circuit Inspection...........................................................................................3830 FRONT FOG LAMP..........................................................................................................3831 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3831 System Description..................................................................................................3831 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3831 Fog Lamp Operation..........................................................................................3832 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3832 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3832 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3832 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3833 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3834 System Diagram..............................................................................................3834 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3834 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3837 System Diagram..............................................................................................3837 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3837 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3840 System Diagram..............................................................................................3840 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3841 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3843 System Diagram..............................................................................................3843 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3844 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —............................................................................................3847 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................3849 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3850 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3850 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3850 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3850 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................3851 Front Fog lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides)......................................................................3852 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side).......................................................................3854 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3855 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3856 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3856 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3856 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3856 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS....................................................................................3857 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3857 System Description..................................................................................................3857 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3857 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION...........................................................................................3857 LH Turn.....................................................................................................3858 RH Turn.....................................................................................................3858 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION...........................................................................................3858 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION...........................................................................3859 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3860 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3860 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3860 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3861 System Diagram..............................................................................................3861 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3862 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3864 System Diagram..............................................................................................3864 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3864 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3867 System Diagram..............................................................................................3867 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3868 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3870 System Diagram..............................................................................................3870 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3871 Schematic...........................................................................................................3874 Wiring Diagram — TURN —.............................................................................................3875 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................3878 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3879 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3880 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3880 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................3881 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3881 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3882 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3882 Display Item List...........................................................................................3882 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3882 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3882 Display Item List...........................................................................................3882 Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate...................................................................................3882 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate..............................................................................3884 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operates..................................................3886 Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate.........................................................................3887 Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)...........................................................................3887 Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp)............................................................................3887 Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp..................................................................3887 Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...................................................................3887 Removal and Installation of Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit......................................................3888 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3888 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3888 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH.........................................................................................3889 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3889 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3889 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3889 HAZARD SWITCH...........................................................................................................3890 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3890 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3890 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3890 COMBINATION SWITCH......................................................................................................3891 Wiring Diagram — COMBSW —...........................................................................................3891 Combination Switch Reading Function.................................................................................3892 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................3892 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3892 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3893 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3893 Display Item List...........................................................................................3893 Combination Switch Inspection.......................................................................................3894 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3896 STOP LAMP...............................................................................................................3897 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3897 System Description..................................................................................................3897 Schematic...........................................................................................................3898 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —...........................................................................................3899 Stop Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3902 High-Mounted Stop Lamp..............................................................................................3904 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3904 Stop Lamp...........................................................................................................3904 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3904 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3904 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3904 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3904 STEP LAMP...............................................................................................................3905 Front Door Step Lamp................................................................................................3905 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3905 Rear Door Step Lamp.................................................................................................3905 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3905 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................................................................3906 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —...........................................................................................3906 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3907 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3907 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS...................................................................................3908 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3908 System Description..................................................................................................3908 OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH....................................................................................3909 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3910 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3910 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3910 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3910 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3911 System Diagram..............................................................................................3911 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3911 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3914 System Diagram..............................................................................................3914 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3914 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3917 System Diagram..............................................................................................3917 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3918 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3920 System Diagram..............................................................................................3920 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3921 Schematic...........................................................................................................3924 Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —...........................................................................................3925 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................3930 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3931 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3931 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3931 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3931 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................3932 Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate.............................................................3933 Tail Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3938 Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)....................................3939 License Plate Lamp..................................................................................................3939 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3939 Front Parking (Clearance) Lamp......................................................................................3940 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3940 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3940 Tail Lamp...........................................................................................................3940 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3940 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3940 Front Side Marker Lamp..............................................................................................3940 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3940 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3940 Rear Side Marker Lamp...............................................................................................3940 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3940 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3940 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3940 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3940 REAR COMBINATION LAMP...................................................................................................3941 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3941 REAR FENDER SIDE (REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB)...................................................................3941 BACK DOOR SIDE (BACK-UP LAMP)...................................................................................3941 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3941 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3941 Rear Fender Side............................................................................................3941 Trunk Lid Side..............................................................................................3942 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3942 VANITY MIRROR LAMP......................................................................................................3943 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3943 MAP LAMP................................................................................................................3944 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3944 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3944 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3944 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3944 PERSONAL LAMP...........................................................................................................3945 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3945 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3945 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3945 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3945 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP.......................................................................................................3946 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3946 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3946 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3946 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3946 IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION..........................................................................................3947 Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation..........................................................................3947 GLOVE BOX LAMP..........................................................................................................3948 Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation..........................................................................3948 ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION....................................................................................................3949 Bulb Replacement and Removal and Installation.......................................................................3949 CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION..........................................................................................3950 Bulb Replacement and Removal and Installation.......................................................................3950 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP......................................................................................................3951 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3951 System Description..................................................................................................3951 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................3951 SWITCH OPERATION................................................................................................3952 ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION.......................................................................................3953 Without Intelligent Key System..............................................................................3953 With Intelligent Key System.................................................................................3954 INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3954 Schematic...........................................................................................................3956 Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —...........................................................................................3958 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................3966 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3966 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3967 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT..................................................................3967 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................3968 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3968 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3969 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3969 Display Item List...........................................................................................3969 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3969 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3969 Display Item List...........................................................................................3969 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3970 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3970 Display Item List...........................................................................................3970 Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate.........................................................................3970 Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate...................................................................................3972 Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate..............................................................................3974 Ignition key Hole illumination Control Does Not Operate.............................................................3975 All Step Lamps Do Not Operate.......................................................................................3976 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate..............................................................................3977 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3977 ROOM LAMP.......................................................................................................3977 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3978 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3978 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3978 ROOM LAMP.......................................................................................................3978 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3978 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3978 ILLUMINATION............................................................................................................3979 System Description..................................................................................................3979 ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH.......................................................................3979 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3980 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3980 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3981 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................3982 System Diagram..............................................................................................3982 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3982 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................3985 System Diagram..............................................................................................3985 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3985 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................3988 System Diagram..............................................................................................3988 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3989 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................3991 System Diagram..............................................................................................3991 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................3992 Schematic...........................................................................................................3995 Wiring Diagram — ILL —..............................................................................................3997 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4005 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH.....................................................................................4005 GLOVE BOX LAMP..................................................................................................4005 FRONT DOOR INSIDE ILLUMINATION..................................................................................4005 BULB SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................4006 Headlamp............................................................................................................4006 Exterior Lamp.......................................................................................................4006 Interior Lamp/Illumination..........................................................................................4006 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 lu..............................................................................................................................4007 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4007 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................4009 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................4009 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................4009 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................4009 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................4010 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................4010 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................4010 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................4011 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................4011 System Drawing..................................................................................................4012 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................4013 Inspection......................................................................................................4013 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................4013 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................4013 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................4013 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................4014 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................4015 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................4016 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4016 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4016 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4016 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4017 OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)............................................................................................4018 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4018 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4018 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4018 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4018 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................4020 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4020 2WD MODEL...................................................................................................4020 AWD MODEL...................................................................................................4021 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4021 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................4021 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................4021 Relief Valve............................................................................................4021 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4022 2WD Model...............................................................................................4022 AWD Model...............................................................................................4022 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4022 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................4023 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4023 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4023 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4023 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4023 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................4023 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................4023 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................4024 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................4024 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................4024 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................4025 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................4026 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................4026 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.........................................................................................4026 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................4026 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................4026 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................4026 VK45DE..................................................................................................................4027 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................4027 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................4027 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................4027 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................4028 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................4028 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................4028 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................4029 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................4029 System Drawing..................................................................................................4030 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................4031 Inspection......................................................................................................4031 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................4031 OIL APPEARANCE..............................................................................................4031 OIL LEAKAGE.................................................................................................4031 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................4031 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................4032 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................4033 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4033 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4033 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4033 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4033 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................4034 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4034 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4034 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................4034 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................4034 Relief Valve............................................................................................4034 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4034 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4035 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................4036 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4036 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4036 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4036 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4036 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................4037 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................4037 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................4037 Clearance of Oil Pump Parts.............................................................................4037 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................4038 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................4038 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................4039 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................4039 OIL PRESSURE................................................................................................4039 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................4039 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................4039 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................4039 ma..............................................................................................................................4041 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4041 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4043 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4043 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4043 GENERAL MAINTENANCE.....................................................................................................4044 Explanation of General Maintenance..................................................................................4044 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................4047 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance................................................................................4047 Schedule 1..........................................................................................................4048 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................4048 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................4049 Schedule 2..........................................................................................................4050 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................4050 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................4051 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.......................................................................................4052 Fluids and Lubricants...............................................................................................4052 SAE Viscosity Number................................................................................................4053 GASOLINE ENGINE OIL.............................................................................................4053 Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio...................................................................................4053 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)......................................................................................4054 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................4054 Tension Adjustment..................................................................................................4054 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.....................................................................4055 AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT.................................................................................4055 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................4055 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................4055 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................4056 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................4057 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................4057 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................4057 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................4057 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................4058 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................4059 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4059 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4059 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4059 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................4060 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4060 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4060 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4061 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................4061 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VK45DE ENGINE)......................................................................................4062 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................4062 Tension Adjustment..................................................................................................4062 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................4062 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................4062 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................4063 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................4064 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................4065 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................4065 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................4065 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................4066 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................4066 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4066 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4066 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4067 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................4067 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4067 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4067 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4068 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................4068 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE............................................................................................4069 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................4069 Checking A/T Fluid..................................................................................................4069 Changing A/T Fluid..................................................................................................4071 Checking Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................4071 Changing Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................4072 Checking Propeller Shaft............................................................................................4072 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4072 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4073 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................4073 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4073 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................4073 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................4074 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks................................................................................4075 Checking Brake Lines and Cables.....................................................................................4075 Changing Brake Fluid................................................................................................4075 Checking Disc Brake.................................................................................................4075 ROTOR...........................................................................................................4075 CALIPER.........................................................................................................4076 PAD.............................................................................................................4076 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage..................................................................................4076 STEERING GEAR...................................................................................................4076 STEERING LINKAGE................................................................................................4076 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines.............................................................................4076 Axle and Suspension Parts...........................................................................................4077 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................4077 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch............................................................................4078 Checking Seat Belt, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters......................................................4078 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4079 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................4079 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VQ35DE)............................................................................4079 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VK45DE)............................................................................4079 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)..................................................................4079 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)..................................................................4079 RADIATOR........................................................................................................4079 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................4079 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)......................................................................4080 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................4080 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VK45DE)......................................................................4080 WHEEL BALANCE...................................................................................................4080 pb..............................................................................................................................4081 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4081 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................................................................4082 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................4082 PEDAL STROKE....................................................................................................4082 INSPECT COMPONENTS..............................................................................................4082 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................4082 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL...................................................................................................4083 Components..........................................................................................................4083 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4083 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4083 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4084 PARKING BRAKE SHOE......................................................................................................4085 Components..........................................................................................................4085 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4085 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4085 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4086 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4086 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4087 Parking Drum Brake..................................................................................................4087 Parking Brake Control...............................................................................................4087 pg..............................................................................................................................4089 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4089 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................4091 Schematic...........................................................................................................4091 Wiring Diagram - POWER -............................................................................................4092 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION.............................................................4092 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON”..........................................................4098 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START”.....................................................4100 Fuse................................................................................................................4105 Fusible Link........................................................................................................4105 Circuit Breaker.....................................................................................................4105 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)............................................................4106 System Description..................................................................................................4106 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R..................................................................................4106 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL..................................................................................4106 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL.........................................................................................4107 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4108 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4108 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................4109 System Diagram..............................................................................................4109 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4109 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................4112 System Diagram..............................................................................................4112 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4112 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................4115 System Diagram..............................................................................................4115 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4116 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................4118 System Diagram..............................................................................................4118 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4119 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction....................................................................4122 CONSULT-II..........................................................................................................4123 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................4123 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................4124 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4124 Display Item List...........................................................................................4124 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4125 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4125 All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu.....................................................................4125 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4125 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4125 Auto Active Test....................................................................................................4127 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4127 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................4127 INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE.............................................................................4127 Concept of Auto Active Test.................................................................................4128 Schematic...........................................................................................................4129 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement.......................................................................................4130 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection............................................................................4131 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis).........................................................................4132 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R................................................................................4133 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4133 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4133 GROUND..................................................................................................................4134 Ground Distribution.................................................................................................4134 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................4134 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................4137 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4140 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4141 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4142 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4143 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................4144 BODY NO.2 HARNESS...............................................................................................4147 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................4148 HARNESS.................................................................................................................4149 Harness Layout......................................................................................................4149 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT......................................................................................4149 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................4150 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................4151 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................4154 Engine Compartment..........................................................................................4154 Passenger Compartment.......................................................................................4156 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4157 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4158 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4159 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4161 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................4163 BODY NO.2 HARNESS...............................................................................................4165 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................4166 FRONT DOOR HARNESS..............................................................................................4167 LH Side.....................................................................................................4167 RH Side.....................................................................................................4167 REAR DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................4168 LH Side.....................................................................................................4168 RH Side.....................................................................................................4168 BACK DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................4169 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)...................................................................................4170 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................................................................................4173 Electrical Units Location...........................................................................................4173 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................4173 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................4174 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................4176 HARNESS CONNECTOR.......................................................................................................4177 Description.........................................................................................................4177 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)............................................................................4177 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)..........................................................................4178 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)...................................................................................................4179 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4179 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................4180 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4180 SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION)...........................................................................................4182 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4182 STANDARDIZED RELAY......................................................................................................4184 Description.........................................................................................................4184 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS................................................................4184 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS.....................................................................................4184 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B).........................................................................................4186 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4186 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................4187 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4187 pr..............................................................................................................................4189 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4189 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4190 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4190 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4190 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4191 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4191 FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT...................................................................................................4192 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................4192 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................4192 APPEARANCE CHECKING.............................................................................................4192 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4192 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4192 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4193 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4193 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT....................................................................................................4195 Service Information.................................................................................................4195 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................4195 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................4195 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................4195 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4196 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4197 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4197 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4199 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4200 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4200 Center Bearing..............................................................................................4200 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4201 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4203 General Specifications..............................................................................................4203 2WD MODEL.......................................................................................................4203 AWD MODEL.......................................................................................................4203 Front Propeller Shaft...............................................................................................4203 JOURNAL AXIAL PLAY..............................................................................................4203 PROPELLER SHAFT RUNOUT LIMIT....................................................................................4203 Rear Propeller Shaft................................................................................................4203 JOURNAL AXIAL PLAY..............................................................................................4203 PROPELLER SHAFT RUNOUT LIMIT....................................................................................4203 ps..............................................................................................................................4205 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4205 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4207 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4207 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................4207 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................4207 Precautions for Steering System.....................................................................................4207 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4209 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4209 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4210 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4211 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4211 POWER STEERING FLUID....................................................................................................4212 Checking Fluid Level................................................................................................4212 Checking Fluid Leakage..............................................................................................4212 Air Bleeding Hydraulic System.......................................................................................4212 STEERING WHEEL..........................................................................................................4214 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4214 CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION..............................................................................4214 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY....................................................................................4214 CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL.....................................................................4214 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE...........................................................................4214 CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..............................................................................4215 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4215 STEERING COLUMN.........................................................................................................4216 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4216 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4216 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4218 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4218 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4218 Components (without Automatic Drive Positioner).....................................................................4219 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4219 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4219 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4220 Components (with Automatic Drive Positioner)........................................................................4221 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4222 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4222 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4222 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE.........................................................................................4223 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4223 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4223 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4224 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4225 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4226 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4227 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4229 Boot........................................................................................................4229 Rack........................................................................................................4229 Sub-Gear Assembly...........................................................................................4229 Gear Housing Assembly.......................................................................................4229 Outer Socket and Inner Socket...............................................................................4229 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4230 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP.................................................................................................4235 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4235 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VQ35DE MODELS)....................................................................4235 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VK45DE MODELS)....................................................................4235 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................4236 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4236 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4237 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Models)............................................................................4237 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4237 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4237 Disassembly and Assembly (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................4237 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................4237 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4238 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4238 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................4238 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................4238 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4239 Disassembly and Assembly (VK45DE Models)............................................................................4241 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................4241 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4242 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4242 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................4242 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................4242 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4242 HYDRAULIC LINE..........................................................................................................4245 Components..........................................................................................................4245 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4247 Component...........................................................................................................4248 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4249 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4250 Steering Wheel......................................................................................................4250 Steering Angle......................................................................................................4250 Steering Column.....................................................................................................4250 Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket..............................................................................4250 Steering Gear.......................................................................................................4251 Oil Pump............................................................................................................4251 Steering Fluid......................................................................................................4251 rax.............................................................................................................................4253 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4253 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4254 Caution.............................................................................................................4254 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4255 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4255 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4255 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4256 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4256 WHEEL HUB...............................................................................................................4257 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4257 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION........................................................................................4257 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4257 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4257 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4258 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................4258 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4258 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4258 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4258 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................4258 Bushing.....................................................................................................4259 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4259 Wheel Hub...................................................................................................4259 Axle........................................................................................................4259 Back Plate..................................................................................................4259 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4259 Bushing.....................................................................................................4259 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................4260 INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................4260 REAR DRIVE SHAFT........................................................................................................4261 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4261 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4261 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4261 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4261 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4262 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4262 Final Drive Side............................................................................................4262 Wheel Side..................................................................................................4263 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4263 Shaft.......................................................................................................4263 Joint Sub-assembly..........................................................................................4263 Sliding Joint Side (Housing)................................................................................4263 Ball Cage...................................................................................................4263 Steel Ball..................................................................................................4263 Inner Race..................................................................................................4263 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4264 Final Drive Side............................................................................................4264 Wheel Side..................................................................................................4265 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4267 Wheel Bearing.......................................................................................................4267 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................4267 rf..............................................................................................................................4269 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4269 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4270 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4270 Precautions.........................................................................................................4270 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4271 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4271 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4271 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................4272 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4272 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4272 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4273 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4273 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4273 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4273 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4274 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4274 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4274 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4274 DOORS...........................................................................................................4274 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4275 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4275 SEATS...........................................................................................................4275 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4275 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4276 SUNROOF.................................................................................................................4278 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4278 System Description..................................................................................................4279 TILT UP / SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION.................................................................................4279 TILT DOWN / SLIDE OPEN OPERATION................................................................................4279 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................4279 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................4279 ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION.............................................................................................4280 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE..........................................................................................4280 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE........................................................................................4280 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4281 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4281 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................4282 System Diagram..............................................................................................4282 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4282 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................4285 System Diagram..............................................................................................4285 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4285 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................4288 System Diagram..............................................................................................4288 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4289 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................4291 System Diagram..............................................................................................4291 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4292 Wiring Diagram — SROOF —............................................................................................4295 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................4296 Terminals and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly............................................................4296 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4297 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................4297 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4298 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4298 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................4298 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................4299 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check of BCM........................................................................4299 Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check........................................................4300 Sunroof Switch System Check.........................................................................................4301 Door Switch Check...................................................................................................4303 Wind Deflector Inspection...........................................................................................4305 Link and Wire Assembly..............................................................................................4305 Fitting Adjustment..................................................................................................4305 LID WEATHERSTRIP OVERLAP ADJUSTMENT AND SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT.............................................4306 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4306 SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY...........................................................................................4308 Removal.....................................................................................................4308 Installation................................................................................................4309 GLASS LID.......................................................................................................4309 Removal.....................................................................................................4309 Installation................................................................................................4309 SUNSHADE........................................................................................................4310 Removal.....................................................................................................4310 Installation................................................................................................4310 WIND DEFLECTOR..................................................................................................4310 Removal.....................................................................................................4310 Installation................................................................................................4310 SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY..........................................................................................4310 Removal.....................................................................................................4310 Installation................................................................................................4310 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 rfd.............................................................................................................................4313 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4313 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4314 Precautions.........................................................................................................4314 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4315 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4315 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4317 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4318 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4318 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4319 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4319 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4319 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4319 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4321 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4321 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4321 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4322 REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................4323 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4323 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4323 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4323 Components..........................................................................................................4324 R200 2-PINION...................................................................................................4324 Pre-Inspection......................................................................................................4325 TOTAL PRELOAD...................................................................................................4325 DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH.............................................................................4325 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................4325 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................4326 TOOTH CONTACT...................................................................................................4326 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4326 REMOVAL OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY...........................................................................4326 REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY................................................................................4327 DISASSEMBLY OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY.......................................................................4329 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4330 ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE.................................................................................4331 Thrust Washer Selection.....................................................................................4331 SIDE BEARING PRELOAD............................................................................................4332 PINION GEAR HEIGHT..............................................................................................4333 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer Selection....................................................................4335 TOOTH CONTACT...................................................................................................4337 ASSEMBLY OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY..........................................................................4338 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY...........................................................................4339 INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY......................................................................4340 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4343 General Specifications..............................................................................................4343 Drive Gear Runout...................................................................................................4343 Side Gear Adjustment................................................................................................4343 AVAILABLE SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS..............................................................................4343 Drive Pinion Height Adjustment......................................................................................4343 AVAILABLE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHERS.......................................................................4343 Drive Pinion Preload Adjustment.....................................................................................4343 Side Bearing Preload Adjustment.....................................................................................4343 SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING WASHERS..................................................................................4344 Total Preload Adjustment............................................................................................4344 Companion Flange....................................................................................................4344 rsu.............................................................................................................................4345 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4345 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4346 Cautions............................................................................................................4346 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4347 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4347 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4347 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4348 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4348 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4349 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4349 INSPECTION OF SUSPENSION ARM BALL JOINT END PLAY................................................................4349 SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.......................................................................................4349 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................4349 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4349 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................4349 CAMBER INSPECTION...............................................................................................4349 TOE-IN..........................................................................................................4350 Components..........................................................................................................4351 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4352 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4352 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4352 SHOCK ABSORBER..........................................................................................................4353 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4353 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4353 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4353 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4353 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4353 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4353 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4354 Bound Bumper and Bushing....................................................................................4354 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4354 SUSPENSION ARM..........................................................................................................4355 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4355 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4355 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4355 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................4355 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................4355 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................4355 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................4355 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................4355 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4356 RADIUS ROD..............................................................................................................4357 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4357 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4357 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4357 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4357 FRONT LOWER LINK........................................................................................................4358 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4358 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4358 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4358 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4358 REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING...........................................................................................4359 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4359 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4359 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4359 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4359 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................4360 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4360 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4360 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4360 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4360 REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER..................................................................................................4361 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4361 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4361 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4361 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4361 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4362 Wheel Alignment.....................................................................................................4362 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................4362 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................4362 sb..............................................................................................................................4363 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4363 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4364 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4364 Precaution for Seat Belt Service....................................................................................4364 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4364 SEAT BELTS..............................................................................................................4366 System Description..................................................................................................4366 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................4366 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP..........................................................................................4366 Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt.........................................................................4366 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR............................................................................4367 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.......................................................................4367 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE...............................................................................4367 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE..........................................................................4367 Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt..........................................................................4368 REMOVAL OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.............................................................................4369 INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR........................................................................4369 Seat Belt Inspection................................................................................................4370 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4370 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................4370 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION.......................................................................4371 Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)...................................4371 Stationary Inspection for ELR Function......................................................................4371 Stationary Inspection for ALR Function......................................................................4371 Moving Inspection for ELR Function..........................................................................4371 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE INSPECTION......................................................................4372 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM....................................................................4373 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4373 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4373 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4373 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT........................................................................................4374 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4374 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4374 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4374 sc..............................................................................................................................4375 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4375 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4376 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4376 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4376 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4377 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4377 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4377 BATTERY.................................................................................................................4378 How to Handle Battery...............................................................................................4378 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE............................................................................4378 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL......................................................................................4379 Sulphation..................................................................................................4379 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK..........................................................................................4379 Hydrometer Temperature Correction...........................................................................4379 CHARGING THE BATTERY............................................................................................4380 Charging Rates..............................................................................................4380 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester......................................................4380 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4382 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4383 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4383 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4383 STARTING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4384 System Description..................................................................................................4384 Wiring Diagram — START —............................................................................................4385 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4385 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4386 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester......................................................4387 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4387 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4388 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4389 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4389 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4390 Check “S” Connector Circuit.................................................................................4390 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE.......................................4390 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4391 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4391 Removal.....................................................................................................4391 Installation................................................................................................4391 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (2WD)......................................................................................4392 Removal.....................................................................................................4392 Installation................................................................................................4392 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (AWD)......................................................................................4393 Removal.....................................................................................................4393 Installation................................................................................................4393 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4394 Inspection After Disassembly........................................................................................4396 PINION/CLUTCH CHECK.............................................................................................4396 CHARGING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4397 System Description..................................................................................................4397 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —...........................................................................................4398 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4398 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4399 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester......................................................4400 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4401 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4402 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4403 Check “L” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4403 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4404 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4404 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4405 Check “L” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4405 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4..........................................................................................4406 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4406 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5..........................................................................................4407 Check “S” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4407 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR...........................................................................................4407 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4408 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4408 Removal.....................................................................................................4408 Installation................................................................................................4409 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4409 Removal.....................................................................................................4409 Installation................................................................................................4410 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4411 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4413 Battery.............................................................................................................4413 Starter.............................................................................................................4413 Alternator..........................................................................................................4413 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 se..............................................................................................................................4415 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4415 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4417 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4417 Service Notice......................................................................................................4417 Precautions for Work................................................................................................4417 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4418 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4418 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4418 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................4419 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4419 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4419 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4420 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4420 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4420 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4420 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4421 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4421 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4421 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4421 DOORS...........................................................................................................4421 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4422 SUNROOF/HEADLINER...............................................................................................4422 SEATS...........................................................................................................4422 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4422 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4423 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER..............................................................................................4425 Manual Operation....................................................................................................4425 Automatic Operation.................................................................................................4425 System Description..................................................................................................4425 FAIL- SAFE MODE.................................................................................................4426 CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE........................................................................................4426 MEMORY STORING AND KEY FOB INTERLOCK STORING....................................................................4426 MEMORY SWITCH OPERATION.........................................................................................4428 ENTRY OPERATION.................................................................................................4428 EXITING OPERATION...............................................................................................4428 KEY FOB INTERLOCK OPERATION.....................................................................................4429 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4430 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4431 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4431 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................4432 System Diagram..............................................................................................4432 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4433 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................4435 System Diagram..............................................................................................4435 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4435 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................4439 System Diagram..............................................................................................4439 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4439 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................4442 System Diagram..............................................................................................4442 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4443 Schematic...........................................................................................................4446 Wiring Diagram–AUT/DP–..............................................................................................4448 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4459 Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit..........................................4459 Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit.........................................................4461 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4464 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4464 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION.........................................................................................4464 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND...................................................................................4465 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4467 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................4468 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS..........................................................................................4469 Display Item List...........................................................................................4469 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4469 Selection from Menu.........................................................................................4469 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4470 Display Item List...........................................................................................4471 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-diagnosis)......................................................4471 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................4471 Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection....................................................................................4473 Reclining Motor Circuit Inspection..................................................................................4474 Front Lifting Motor Circuit Inspection..............................................................................4475 Rear Lifting Motor Circuit Inspection...............................................................................4477 Telescopic Motor Circuit Inspection.................................................................................4478 Tilt Motor Circuit Inspection.......................................................................................4480 Mirror Motor (Driver Side) Circuit Check............................................................................4481 Mirror Motor (Passenger Side) Circuit Check.........................................................................4483 Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection...................................................................................4485 Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection.................................................................................4486 Front Lifting Sensor Circuit Inspection.............................................................................4487 Rear Lifting Sensor Circuit Inspection..............................................................................4488 Telescopic Sensor Circuit Inspection................................................................................4489 Tilt Sensor Circuit Inspection......................................................................................4490 Mirror Sensor (Driver Side) Circuit Check...........................................................................4491 Mirror Sensor (Passenger Side) Circuit Check........................................................................4492 Steering and Door Mirror Sensor Power and Ground Circuit Inspection.................................................4493 Front Door Switch (Driver Side) Circuit Inspection..................................................................4494 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection...................................................................................4496 Reclining Switch Inspection.........................................................................................4498 Front Lifting Switch Circuit Inspection.............................................................................4499 Rear Lifting Switch Circuit Inspection..............................................................................4501 Sliding Switch and Reclining Switch Ground Circuit Inspection.......................................................4502 Front Lifting Switch and Rear Lifting Switch Ground Circuit Inspection..............................................4503 Telescopic Switch Circuit Inspection................................................................................4504 Tilt Switch Circuit Inspection......................................................................................4506 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover switch) Circuit Check.................................................4508 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check.....................................................4510 Detention Switch (P Range Switch) Circuit Inspection................................................................4512 Key Switch and Ignition Knob Switch Circuit Inspection (With Intelligent Key).......................................4513 Key Switch Circuit Inspection (Without Intelligent Key).............................................................4515 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection...............................................................................4516 Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection............................................................................4518 Uart Communication Line Circuit Inspection..........................................................................4519 Lumber Support Circuit Inspection...................................................................................4521 POWER SEAT..............................................................................................................4523 Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Power Seat..................................................................4523 Schematic...........................................................................................................4524 Wiring Diagram–SEAT– for Driver Seat................................................................................4525 Wiring Diagram–SEAT– for Passenger Seat.............................................................................4527 HEATED SEAT.............................................................................................................4528 Description.........................................................................................................4528 Wiring Diagram – HSEAT –............................................................................................4529 FRONT SEAT..............................................................................................................4531 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4531 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4533 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4534 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4534 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4535 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4535 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4536 REAR SEAT...............................................................................................................4537 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4537 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4539 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4539 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4539 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4539 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4540 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4540 REMOVAL OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER.................................................................................4541 INSTALLATION OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER............................................................................4541 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 srs.............................................................................................................................4543 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4543 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4545 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4545 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service.................................................4545 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4545 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4546 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4546 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4546 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS).....................................................................................4547 SRS Configuration...................................................................................................4547 Front Seat Belt Pre-Tensioner with Load Limiter.....................................................................4548 Front Side Air Bag..................................................................................................4548 Side Curtain Air Bag................................................................................................4548 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4549 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction......................................................................................4549 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION..............................................................................................4549 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR..................................................4549 Information from Customer...................................................................................4549 Preliminary Check...........................................................................................4549 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4550 Component Parts Location............................................................................................4551 Schematic...........................................................................................................4552 Wiring Diagram — SRS —..............................................................................................4553 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4557 DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II...................................................................................4557 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II...............................................................4557 From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode............................................................................4557 From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode............................................................................4557 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS............................................................................4558 Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II)........................................................................4558 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................4558 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS.............................................................................4558 SRS Operation Check.................................................................................................4559 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4559 Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — User Mode......................................4559 Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II...................................................................................4561 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4561 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”)....................................................4562 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4566 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)..................................................4568 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5..........................................................................................4568 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”)..............................4570 Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II................................................................................4572 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6..........................................................................................4572 Inspecting SRS Malfunctioning Parts by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — Diagnosis Mode........................4572 WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART...................................................................................4573 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off.........................................................4577 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7..........................................................................................4577 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On..........................................................4578 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8..........................................................................................4578 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE...................................................................................................4579 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4579 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4579 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4580 SPIRAL CABLE............................................................................................................4581 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4581 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4581 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4582 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE..........................................................................................4583 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4583 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4583 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4583 FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE...............................................................................................4584 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4584 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4584 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4585 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE.............................................................................................4586 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4586 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4586 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4587 CRASH ZONE SENSOR.......................................................................................................4588 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4588 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4588 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4588 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR.........................................................................................4589 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4589 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4589 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4589 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER...........................................................................................4590 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4590 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT...................................................................................................4591 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4591 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4591 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4591 ECU DISCRIMINATED NO............................................................................................4591 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER..................................................................4592 Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner..............................................................4592 CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL........................................................................................4592 Connecting to Battery.......................................................................................4592 Deployment Tool Check.......................................................................................4592 Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart (Battery Connected).........................................4593 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)...................................................4593 Deployment of Driver Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)....................................................4593 Deployment of Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)...........................................4594 Deployment of Front Side Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)................................................4595 Deployment of Side Curtain Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)..............................................4596 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)..........................................4597 DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN VEHICLE...............................4598 DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER.........................................................4598 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................................4599 For Frontal Collision...............................................................................................4599 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)..........................................................................4599 For Side Collision..................................................................................................4600 WHEN THE SIDE AIR BAG IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:.......................................................4600 WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:................................................................4600 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION).............................................................................4601 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 tf..............................................................................................................................4603 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4603 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4605 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4605 Precautions.........................................................................................................4605 Service Notice......................................................................................................4606 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4606 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4607 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4607 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4609 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4609 TRANSFER FLUID..........................................................................................................4610 Replacement.........................................................................................................4610 DRAINING........................................................................................................4610 FILLING.........................................................................................................4610 Inspection..........................................................................................................4610 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL...................................................................................4610 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4611 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4611 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4611 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4611 REAR OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4612 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4612 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4612 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4613 AIR BREATHER HOSE.......................................................................................................4614 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4614 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................4615 Removal and Installation from Vehicle...............................................................................4615 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4615 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4615 Components..........................................................................................................4616 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4617 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4617 Removal Front Case..........................................................................................4617 Rear Case...................................................................................................4618 Front Drive Shaft...........................................................................................4620 Main Shaft and Electric Controlled Coupling.................................................................4621 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4621 Gears.......................................................................................................4621 Bearings....................................................................................................4621 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4621 Washers.....................................................................................................4621 Oil Seals...................................................................................................4621 Snap Ring...................................................................................................4621 Lock Nut....................................................................................................4621 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4622 Rear Case...................................................................................................4622 Main Shaft and Electric Controlled Coupling.................................................................4623 Front Drive Shaft...........................................................................................4623 Front Case..................................................................................................4624 Install Rear Case...........................................................................................4624 AWD SYSTEM..............................................................................................................4627 System Component....................................................................................................4627 System Description..................................................................................................4627 ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING....................................................................................4627 AWD CONTROL UNIT................................................................................................4628 AWD LOCK SWITCH.................................................................................................4628 AUTO Mode...................................................................................................4628 LOCK Mode (AWD LOCK Indicator Lamp ON)......................................................................4628 AWD WARNING LAMP................................................................................................4628 AWD Warning Lamp Indication.................................................................................4629 FAIL- SAFE FUNCTION.............................................................................................4629 System Diagram......................................................................................................4629 CAN Communication...................................................................................................4630 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................4630 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT (WITHOUT ICC)............................................................................4630 System Diagram..............................................................................................4630 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4631 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT (WITH ICC)...............................................................................4633 System Diagram..............................................................................................4633 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4633 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................4637 Wiring Diagram......................................................................................................4638 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4641 Fail-Safe Function..................................................................................................4641 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................4641 BASIC CONCEPT...................................................................................................4641 Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms................................................................................4642 AWD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values...............................................................4643 AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT......................................................................4643 AWD CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE...............................................................................4643 Specifications Between AWD Control Unit Terminals...........................................................4643 Specifications With CONSULT-II..............................................................................4644 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................4645 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4645 CONSULT-II FUNCTION APPLICATION TABLE...........................................................................4645 SELF-DIAGNOSIS..................................................................................................4645 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4645 Display Item List...........................................................................................4646 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4646 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4646 Display Item List...........................................................................................4647 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4648 Description.................................................................................................4648 Test Item...................................................................................................4648 AWD CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBER....................................................................................4648 Component Inspection................................................................................................4648 AWD SOLENOID VALVE..............................................................................................4648 System Inspection...................................................................................................4649 CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND............................................................................4649 AWD CONTROL UNIT SYSTEM.........................................................................................4650 ABS SYSTEM......................................................................................................4650 AWD ACTUATOR SYSTEM.............................................................................................4650 AWD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM.........................................................................................4651 AWD LOCK SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT..................................................................................4651 AWD SOLENOID SYSTEM.............................................................................................4653 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM........................................................................................4654 Trouble Diagnosis for Symptoms......................................................................................4655 AWD LOCK INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT COME ON FOR APPROXIMATELY 1 SECOND WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS T...............4655 AWD WARNING LAMP DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON....................................................4656 AWD WARNING LAMP DOES NOT GO OUT SEVERAL SECONDS AFTER ENGINE STARTED.(AWD LOCK INDICATOR LAMP GO...............4657 HEAVY TIGHT-CORNER BRAKING SYMPTOM OCCURS WHEN THE VEHICLE IS DRIVEN IN AUTO MODE AND THE STEERIN...............4657 AWD MODE CANNOT BE SWITCHED AFTER ENGINE IS STARTED.............................................................4659 WHILE DRIVING, AWD WARNING LAMP FLASHES RAPIDLY. (WHEN IT FLASHES FOR APPROX. ONE MINUTE, THEN DO...............4659 WHILE DRIVING, AWD WARNING LAMP FLASHES SLOWLY. (WHEN IT CONTINUES TO ILLUMINATE UNTIL ENGINE TUR...............4659 VEHICLE DOES NOT ENTER AWD MODE EVEN THOUGH AWD WARNING LAMP IS OFF.............................................4660 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4663 General Specifications..............................................................................................4663 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 wt..............................................................................................................................4665 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4665 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4667 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4667 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4667 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4668 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4668 ROAD WHEEL..............................................................................................................4669 Inspection..........................................................................................................4669 ALUMINUM WHEEL..................................................................................................4669 STEEL WHEEL.....................................................................................................4669 ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4670 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................4670 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4670 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................4670 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................4671 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM........................................................................................4672 System Components...................................................................................................4672 System Description..................................................................................................4672 TRANSMITTER.....................................................................................................4672 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................4672 ANTENNA.........................................................................................................4673 DISPLAY UNIT....................................................................................................4673 CAN COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................4674 System Description..................................................................................................4674 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4674 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................4674 System Diagram..............................................................................................4674 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4675 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................4677 System Diagram..............................................................................................4677 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4677 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................4681 System Diagram..............................................................................................4681 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4681 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................4684 System Diagram..............................................................................................4684 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4685 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.......................................................................................................4688 Schematic...........................................................................................................4688 Wiring Diagram......................................................................................................4689 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard...........................................................................4692 ID Registration Procedure...........................................................................................4692 ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL................................................................4692 ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL.............................................................4693 Transmitter Wake Up Operation.......................................................................................4694 WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL................................................................................4694 Self-Diagnosis......................................................................................................4695 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4695 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4695 CONSULT-II......................................................................................................4695 CONSULT-II Main Function....................................................................................4695 CONSULT-II Application to Low Tire Pressure Warning System..................................................4695 Self-Diagnostic Results Mode................................................................................4695 Data Monitor Mode...........................................................................................4696 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair......................................................4697 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................4697 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4697 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4698 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart......................................................................................4699 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS.............................................................................4700 Inspection 1: Transmitter or Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit.................................................4700 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 or 24...........................................................................4700 Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1.......................................................................................4700 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 or 48...........................................4700 Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2.......................................................................................4701 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 or 38...........................................................................4701 Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal..................................................................................4702 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52.........................................................................................4702 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4703 Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.......................................4703 Inspection 2: Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On...............................................4704 Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.................................................4706 Inspection 4: Hazard Warning Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On..........................................4707 Inspection 5: “TIRE PRESSURE” Information In Display Unit Does Not Exist............................................4708 Inspection 6: ID Registration Cannot Be Completed...................................................................4708 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION................................................................................................4709 Transmitter.........................................................................................................4709 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4709 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4709 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4711 Road Wheel..........................................................................................................4711 Tire................................................................................................................4711 Tightening Torque...................................................................................................4711 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITSELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98 ww..............................................................................................................................4713 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4713 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................4715 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4715 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4715 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM...........................................................................................4716 Components Parts and Harness Connector Location.....................................................................4716 System Description..................................................................................................4716 LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION.......................................................................................4717 HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION........................................................................................4717 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4717 Wiper Dial Position Setting.................................................................................4718 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4718 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4718 MIST OPERATION..................................................................................................4718 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION..............................................................................................4719 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................4719 Description.................................................................................................4719 Operation Description.......................................................................................4719 BCM - Operation Table of Combination Switches...............................................................4720 Sample Operation: (When Wiper Switch Turned ON).............................................................4720 Operation Mode..............................................................................................4721 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4721 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4722 TYPE 1/TYPE2....................................................................................................4723 System Diagram..............................................................................................4723 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4724 TYPE 3..........................................................................................................4726 System Diagram..............................................................................................4726 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4726 TYPE 4/TYPE5....................................................................................................4730 System Diagram..............................................................................................4730 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4731 TYPE 6..........................................................................................................4733 System Diagram..............................................................................................4733 Input/output Signal Chart...................................................................................4733 Schematic...........................................................................................................4737 Wiring Diagram — WIPER —............................................................................................4738 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4741 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................4742 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4742 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4743 INSPECTION POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT......................................................................4743 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4744 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4744 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4745 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4745 Display Item List...........................................................................................4745 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4746 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4746 Display Item List...........................................................................................4746 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................4746 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4746 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4747 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4747 All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu.....................................................................4747 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4748 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4748 Front Wiper Does Not Operate........................................................................................4748 Front Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position........................................................................4751 Only Front Wiper LO Does Not Operate................................................................................4751 Only Front Wiper HI Does Not Operate................................................................................4752 Only Front Wiper INT Does Not Operate...............................................................................4752 Front Wiper Interval Time Is Not Controlled by Vehicle Speed........................................................4753 Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted...............................................4753 Wipers Do Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates.......................................................................4753 After Front Wipers Operate for 10 Seconds, They Stop for 20 Seconds, and after repeating the oper...................4754 Front Wipers Do Not Stop............................................................................................4755 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location................................4756 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4756 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4756 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................4756 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Motor and Linkage...........................................................4756 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4756 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4757 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Wiper Motor and Linkage...........................................................4757 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4757 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4757 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4758 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4759 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Nozzle.....................................................................4759 Removal and Installation of Front Washer tube Joint.................................................................4759 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4759 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4759 Check Valve Inspection..............................................................................................4760 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper and Washer Switch...........................................................4760 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4760 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4760 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4760 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4760 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4761 Removal and Installation of Washer Motor............................................................................4761 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4761 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4761 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM............................................................................................4762 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4762 System Description..................................................................................................4762 REAR WIPER OPERATION............................................................................................4762 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4763 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4763 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4763 BCM WIPER SWITCH READING FUNCTION...............................................................................4763 Wiring Diagram — WIP/ R —...........................................................................................4764 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4766 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4767 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4768 INSPECTION POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT......................................................................4768 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................4769 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4769 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4770 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4770 Display Item List...........................................................................................4770 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4771 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4771 Display Item List...........................................................................................4771 Rear Wiper Does Not Operate.........................................................................................4771 Rear Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position.........................................................................4772 Only Rear Wiper ON Does Not Operate.................................................................................4773 Only Rear Wiper INT Does Not Operate................................................................................4773 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates.......................................................................4773 Rear Wipers Do Not Stop.............................................................................................4774 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location..................................4775 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4775 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4775 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor........................................................................4776 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4776 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4776 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Blade........................................................................4777 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4777 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4777 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4777 Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle...........................................................................4777 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4777 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4777 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4778 Check Valve Inspection..............................................................................................4778 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper and Washer Switch............................................................4778 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4778 Removal and Installation of Washer Motor............................................................................4778 CIGARETTE LIGHTER.......................................................................................................4779 Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —............................................................................................4779 Removal and Installation of Cigarette Lighter.......................................................................4780 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4780 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4780 POWER SOCKET............................................................................................................4781 Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT —...........................................................................................4781 Removal and Installation of Center Console Box Rear Side Power Socket...............................................4782 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4782 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4782 Removal and Installation of Center Console Box Power Socket.........................................................4782 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4782 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4782 Removal and Installation of Luggage Room Power Socket...............................................................4782 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4782 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4782 HORN....................................................................................................................4783 Wiring Diagram — HORN —.............................................................................................4783 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4784 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4784 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4784 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 90 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 91 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 93 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 97 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 98
VIDEO PREVIEW OF THE MANUAL:
PLEASE NOTE:
- This is the SAME exact manual used by your dealers to fix your vehicle.
- The same can be yours in the next 2-3 mins as you will be directed to the download page immediately after paying for the manual.
- Any queries / doubts regarding your purchase, please feel free to contact [email protected]
S.V
